JP7611206B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to provide an advantageous state for the player.

Some conventional gaming machines are capable of implementing variable displays and can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player, and attempt to heighten interest by outputting the voice of a character (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6209501

However, the problem with Patent Document 1 is that there is room for improvement regarding audio output.

The present invention was developed to address these issues, and aims to provide an amusement machine with improved sound output.

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state will be reached after the effect identification information becomes a reach state ,
As a pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed , there are a first pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed, a second pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after executing a first suggestion effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a third pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after executing a second suggestion effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern,
The third pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second pattern,
In the first pattern, when the performance identification information is a reach, a reach sound corresponding to the reach is output by a voice of a specific character, and then, during a period until the specific notification performance is executed, the specific character is not displayed;
In the second pattern, a first suggestive sound corresponding to the first suggestive performance is output by a voice of the specific character, and then, the specific character can be displayed during a period until the specific notification performance is executed;
In the third pattern, a second suggestive sound corresponding to the second suggestive performance is output by the voice of the specific character, and then the specific character can be displayed during a period until the specific notification performance is executed;
an output period of the second suggestive sound is longer than an output period of the first suggestive sound;
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, for the second pattern which has a high expectation, the specific character is displayed after the voice of the specific character is output, thereby increasing the interest in the period until the specific notification performance is executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improvements in terms of the voice output of the characters.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 173, Figure 248, Figure 249

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view showing an gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a main board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a miss effect determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a main fluctuation pattern of a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a high-base main fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern of a low base. An explanatory diagram showing a high-base sub-fluctuation pattern. 13A to 13F are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table for misses. 13A to 13E are explanatory diagrams showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots in a low base state. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots in a high base state. 3 is an explanatory diagram of each game state. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a special pattern unit, (B) is an explanatory diagram of a variable display of a special pattern, (C) is an explanatory diagram of a display unit for performance, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of a variable display of a sub-pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an input port. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an output port. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing two-byte buffers formed in a RAM used in the switch process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number update process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning presentation process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol buffer shift process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a display process. An explanatory diagram of the lighting control mode of each hold indicator. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a display control process. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of command transmission when a start winning occurs and the timing of starting light control of the reserve display, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of command transmission at the start of variable display and the timing of starting light control when the reserve memory number of the reserve display has been subtracted, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of starting light control of the special pattern and the timing of starting subtraction of the variable display time at the start of variable display. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the trigger for changing the presentation mode in the presentation mode determination process. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a hold change effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect process when a prize is won. An explanatory diagram of the ratio for determining whether or not to execute a flash effect when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a button vibration effect process. An explanatory diagram of the lighting control mode of each sub-hold indicator. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 1A is an explanatory diagram of the processing cycle of the CPU and the performance control CPU, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the animation execution period for each performance mode. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode A, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode B, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode C, and (D1) and (D2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode D. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the movement pattern of the pending display in the appearance animation in presentation mode A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode B. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode B. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode C. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode D. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing the dwell animation in presentation mode A, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing the dwell animation in presentation mode B. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode B, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode C, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode D. An explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in presentation mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the active display area and the pending display area in each presentation mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the animation in each presentation mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display of 1 to 3 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display of 1 to 3 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of when a new pending memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display has begun. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the variable display of pending memory numbers from 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display has begun. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a new pending memory occurs less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new start winning occurs while the number of pending memories is variable displayed as four. This is an explanatory diagram of when a new pending memory occurs in the shift animation of the next variable display after the variable display of four pending memories has ended. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new starting winning occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of reserved memories being four has ended. This is an explanatory diagram of what happens when a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms from the start of the next variable display after the variable display of four pending memories has ended. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 0 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 0 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram showing the occurrence of a new reserved memory more than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the timing of starting variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the timing of starting variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when the number of hold memories is 0 and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when there is one hold memory and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when the number of hold memories is 0 and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when the number of hold memories is 0 and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. A comparison diagram of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram for storing random value values extracted during the start port switch passing process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a special buffer shifting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a special buffer shifting process. This is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram of what happens when reserved memory occurs continuously. This is an explanatory diagram showing when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of variation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing consecutive hit chances. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing consecutive hit chances. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing jam training. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing jam training. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing jam training. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a story reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot round. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of fluctuation at a high base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of fluctuation at a high base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a high base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of fluctuation at a high base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing consecutive hit chances. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing consecutive hit chances. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing SP Reach D. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fanfare period. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot round. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing characters that appear. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of variation example 1 at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of variation example 1 at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of variation example 2 at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of variation example 2 at a low base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of a rapid-fire chance. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach B. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of variation example 1 at a high base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of variation example 2 at a high base. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sound of a rapid-fire chance. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach C. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach D. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds for SP Reach D. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each situation. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a summary of audio output for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a table of output counts and scene counts for each sub-variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a time chart of SP Reach A. An explanatory diagram showing a time chart of SP Reach A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing dialogue sounds during a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing dialogue sounds during a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time chart of a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time chart of a fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the lamp during the fanfare period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the lamp during the fanfare period. An explanatory diagram showing the dialogue sounds during a jackpot round. An explanatory diagram showing the state of the lamps during a jackpot round. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation using a premium character. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation using a premium character. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach time in each base state. FIG. 11A to 11C are explanatory diagrams showing various aspects of a reach in a low base state. An explanatory diagram showing various aspects of the period from after a reach in a low base state to an SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing various aspects of the period from after a reach in a high base state to an SP reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution periods of patterns 1 to 6. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution allocation of patterns 1 to 6. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a POWERZONE. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a HYPERPOWER ZONE. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a HYPERPOWER ZONE. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a HYPERPOWER ZONE. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing dialogue sounds for a zone effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing dialogue sounds for a zone effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an increase in the chance of title notification. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an increase in chances when a win is reached. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of a character's mouth. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of a character's mouth.

The following describes the form for implementing the gaming machine of the present invention based on the examples. Note that in the following examples, the "variable display" of special symbols and decorative symbols may be referred to as "variable display" or simply "variable."

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state is different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the state is changed to the completion state, and the change is executed over the specified period to display the reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "advantageous state" corresponds to the "jackpot gaming state" in this embodiment.
The "game control means" corresponds to the "CPU 103" in this embodiment.
The "performance execution means" corresponds to the "performance control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
The "reserved memory means" corresponds to the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and the "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "predetermined number" corresponds to "the number of first special chart reserved memories and the number of second special chart reserved memories being four" in this embodiment,
The "start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "midway state" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as the image of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "Pending Shift" corresponds to the "Shift Animation" in this embodiment.
The "specific period" corresponds to the "330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation" in this embodiment.
The "predetermined period" corresponds to the "660 ms, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" in this embodiment.
The "pending display position" corresponds to the "pending memory display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state is different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed in the completed state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Just before the variable display of the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "the timing less than 33 ms before the variable display of the number of reserved memories is 0 ends".
"Immediately after the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "a timing less than 33 ms after the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends."

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state is different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the new display of the reserved display overlaps with the reserved display already displayed, the display area used for the gradual change of the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 56, Figure 72 to Figure 74

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the new display of the reserved display overlaps with the reserved display already displayed, the display area used for displaying the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 56, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state is different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, since the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed overlaps the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number when the reserved display already displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number moves, the newly displayed reserved display has a larger display area to be used, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the newly displayed reserved display overlaps the reserved display already displayed, the display area to be used for displaying the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 56, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display,
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display is started, so the gradual change for the new reserved memories is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the movement destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the predetermined number is superimposed on the reserved display that is newly displayed at the predetermined number when the reserved display that has already been displayed moves, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the new display of the reserved display is superimposed on the reserved display that is already displayed, the display area used for the gradual change of the new reserved display is wider, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 56, 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state is different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period; and when the reserved memory number N-hour variable display ends and a new reserved memory is stored before the specific period has elapsed from the reserved shift start timing.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change is changed to the completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, Figure 92
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "prize winning effect" corresponds to the "prize winning flash effect."

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts; and when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the reserved memory number N-hour variable display ends and the next variable display starts.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change is changed to the completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 92

[Form 11]
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state is different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display when the period until the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display ends is longer than the predetermined period; and when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display when the period until the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display ends is shorter than the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, since the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period in which the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth number position overlaps when the reserved display already displayed at the Nth number position moves, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change changes to a completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 92

[Form 12]
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display,
When the pending memory number N-hour variable display is being executed, a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period; when the pending memory number N-hour variable display is being executed, a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started; when the pending memory number N-hour variable display is being executed, a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started; when the pending memory number N-hour variable display has ended and a new pending memory has been stored immediately after the next variable display has started; and when the pending memory number 0-hour variable display is being executed. In this case, the winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display and the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display is not immediately before the end of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display and the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display is immediately before the end of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display; and when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memory is not stored until the next variable display is started, so the gradual change for the new reserved memory is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the movement destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the reserved display newly displayed at the predetermined number overlaps when the reserved display already displayed at the predetermined number moves, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not the gradual change is changed to the completion state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84, and 92

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display in the normal start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the normal start state to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then changing to the normal completion state over the specified period, and displaying the normal reserved display;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the specified period, thereby displaying the special reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the state immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even when the special reserved display is displayed, the rules of the change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or the special completion state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when the normal reserved display is displayed, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 72 to Figure 74
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "normal hold display" corresponds to the "white hold display due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "special hold display" corresponds to the "blue and red hold display due to the decision to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "normal start mode" corresponds to the "white hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when the non-execution of the hold change performance is decided" in this embodiment.
The "normal completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "normal midway state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "special start mode" corresponds to the "blue or red hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when the execution of the hold change performance is decided" in this embodiment,
The "special completion mode" in this embodiment corresponds to the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when the execution of the pending change performance is decided"
The "special intermediate mode" in this embodiment corresponds to "the blue or red hold display that is displayed as the image from the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation when it is decided not to execute the hold change performance."

[Form 14]
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the specified period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the next variable display is to be started in the normal start mode, the normal hold display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special start mode is in the situation, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special hold display is displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal reserved display;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, for reserved memories stored at the same timing as the start of the variable display, the reserved display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules of the change of the gradual display to the normal completed state or the special completed state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 15]
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the normal start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the normal reserved display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed, the normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the normal pending display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, the special pending display is started in the special start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the special pending display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period in which the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth position is overlapped when the reserved display already displayed at the Nth position moves, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules for the change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or special completion state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so that the reserved memory is easier for the player to recognize.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 16]
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the specified period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the next variable display is to be started in the normal start mode, the normal hold display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special start mode is in the situation, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special hold display is displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal reserved display;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, and displaying the special reserved display;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the normal start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the normal reserved display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display;
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is not immediately preceding, if a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed, the normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the normal pending display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is not immediately in advance, if a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, the special pending display is started in the special start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the special start mode to a special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the special pending display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is immediate, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start occurs in the normal start mode, the normal reserved display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal reserved display is displayed;
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is immediate, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start occurs in the special start mode, the special reserved display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is displayed from the normal completion mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display,
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is displayed from the special completion mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display is started, so that the gradual change for the new reserved memories is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period in which the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the move destination from the beginning, so that the gradual change does not need to be changed to a completion state, and the player can see the gradual change. In addition, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the predetermined number is moved and the reserved display newly displayed at the predetermined number is overlapped, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so that the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules of the change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or the special completion state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so that the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 69, 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, over the predetermined period.
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
When in the first mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, in the case where a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at a hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode hold display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, in the case where a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode hold display is displayed;
When the first mode is in progress, the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories ends, and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, over the specific period, to display the first mode reserved display,
In the second mode, when the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the specific period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, for the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position, the reserved display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so that the gradual change does not need to be changed to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the mode of the presentation is different, the rules related to the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied in the same way, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, and 92
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "first mode" corresponds to the "presentation mode A" in this embodiment,
The "second mode" corresponds to the "presentation mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode reserved display" corresponds to the "cube reserved display in the performance mode A" in this embodiment.
The "second mode reserved display" corresponds to the "regular octahedron reserved display in the performance mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in the presentation mode A" in this embodiment,
The "first mode completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in the presentation mode A" in this embodiment,
The "second mode midway state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation in the presentation mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation in the presentation mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in the performance mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode midway state" corresponds to the "pending display displayed as images from the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" in this embodiment.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, over the predetermined period.
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
When in the second mode, the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the first mode start state, the first mode reserved display is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the second mode start state, the display is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
In the second mode, when the variable display at the time of the pending memory number N ends and a new pending memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts, the second mode pending display is started in the second mode start state at the pending display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode pending display is changed to the second mode completion state, and the change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode pending display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, for the reserved memory newly stored at the same timing as the start of the variable display, the reserved display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the mode of the presentation is different, the rules related to the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied in the same way, so that the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 92

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, over the predetermined period.
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
When in the first mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, in the case where a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at a hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode hold display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, in the case where a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode hold display is displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
when in the first mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed, the first mode pending display is started in the first mode start state at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period when the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth position overlaps when the reserved display already displayed at the Nth position moves, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misidentification. Also, even if the presentation mode is different, the same rules regarding the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied, so the reserved memory is easier for the player to recognize.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 92

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, over the predetermined period.
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
When in the second mode, the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the first mode start state, the first mode reserved display is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the second mode start state, the display is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
In the second mode, when the variable display at the time of the Nth reserved memory is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
during the first mode, when the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is not immediately preceding, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed, the first mode pending display is started in the first mode start state at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode pending display is displayed;
during the second mode, when the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is not immediately preceding, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
When in the first mode and the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the reserved memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display at 0 hours of the reserved memory count is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in the first mode start state, the display is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in the second mode start mode, the display is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
When the first mode is in progress and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, from the first mode completion state;
When the second mode is in progress and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the second mode reserved display is displayed from the second mode completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display is started, so that the gradual change for the new reserved memories is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the movement destination from the beginning, so that the gradual change does not need to be changed to the completion mode, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the predetermined number is moved and the reserved display newly displayed at the predetermined number is overlapped, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so that the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. In addition, even if the mode of the performance is different, the same rules related to the change to the completion mode of the gradual display are applied, so that the player can recognize the reserved memory more easily.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84, and 92

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information occurs in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 39, Figure 72 to Figure 74
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "performance control means" corresponds to the "performance control CPU 120" in this embodiment.
The "storage means" corresponds to the "RAM 102, particularly the game control data storage area 001SG150" in this embodiment.
The "specific identification information" corresponds to the "eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LED constituting the special chart unit 201, in particular the LED constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B" in this embodiment.
The "performance control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs constituting the first sub-hold display 151A and the second sub-hold display 151B" in this embodiment,
The "variable display memory area" corresponds to the "entry (storage area) of the reserved number "0" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A or the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "first reserved memory area" corresponds to the "entry (storage area) of reserved numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "starting area" corresponds to the "first starting winning port (winning ball device 6A) and the "second starting winning port (variable winning ball device 6B)" in this embodiment.

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the start mode is reached at the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 39, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero, the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero.
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 39, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the start mode is reached at the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is not immediately before being ended, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 39, 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the granting of game value, first, a stable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, 88, and 89
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "display means" corresponds to the "image display device 5" in this embodiment.
The "reserved ball count display" corresponds to the "reserved display displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the start mode is reached at the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the granting of game value, first, a stable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 88, Figure 89

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero, the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero.
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first, and then making the reserved ball count display on the display means visible, the reserved memory number can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 88, Figure 89

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the start mode is reached at the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is not immediately before being ended, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first, and then making the reserved ball count display on the display means visible, the reserved memory number can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 84, 88, and 89

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to make the player recognize by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to the passage of the game medium through the starting area, and among them, by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the initial state until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, and 85
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" in this embodiment is the "LED constituting the special symbol unit 201, in particular the LED constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B."
The "initial state" corresponds to the "state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment.
The "final state" corresponds to the "state in which the eighth LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment.
The "specific display" corresponds to the "active display" in this embodiment.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the start mode is reached at the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to make the player recognize by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to the passage of the game medium through the starting area, and among them, by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the initial state until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 85

[Mode 31]
The gaming machine of embodiment 31 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
In the case where the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero, the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero.
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Furthermore, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to allow multiple means to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 85

[Mode 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the start mode is reached at the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is not immediately before being ended, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to allow multiple means to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72, 73, 75, 76, 81 to 85

[Mode 33]
The gaming machine of embodiment 33 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on the execution of the variable display of the specific identification information,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the fact that the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a starting area, the light emitting means on the game control means changes to a state corresponding to the execution of the variable display of specific identification information before the light emitting means on the performance control means changes to a state corresponding to the execution of the variable display of specific identification information.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means side visible first, and then making the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side visible, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display of specific identification information is being performed using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 85
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "multiple reserved memory areas including the first reserved memory area" correspond to the "first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 39

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of embodiment 35 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
The performance control means includes:
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area based on moving the storage of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area to the variable display memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 83, Figure 85

[Mode 36]
The gaming machine of embodiment 36 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to cause the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, it is possible to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, it is possible to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the method executes control to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area based on moving the storage of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area to the variable display memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the gaming medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the reserved ball count display is not displayed in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, and the display of the reserved ball count display is maintained in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, the reserved ball count display of the display means is changed from a display in which the reserved memory number is 1 to a display in which the reserved memory number is 0, so that for just a moment the reserved memory number is displayed as 1, which prevents the reserved ball count display from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 100

[Mode 37]
The gaming machine of embodiment 37 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
when the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the effect control means changes the state of the light emitting means on the game control means to a state corresponding to information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then changes the state of the light emitting means on the effect control means to a state corresponding to information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means on the game control means side is made visible first, and then the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side is made visible, so that the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 81, Figure 82

[Mode 38]
The gaming machine of embodiment 38 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding a variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, the game control means can change the state of the light emitting means on the game control means to a state corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of a specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, the presentation control means is capable of displaying the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the performance control means changes the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then changes the state of the reserved ball count display to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means on the game control means side is made visible first, and then the number of reserved balls displayed on the display means is made visible, allowing the number of reserved memories to be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 88, Figure 89

[Mode 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
the performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a specific display when information regarding a variable display of the specific identification information is stored;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
said performance control means, when the game medium passes through a start area in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in said storage means, starts displaying said specific indication during a period from when the state of said light emitting means on said game control means side becomes said initial state to when it becomes said final state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to allow multiple means to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the passing of the gaming medium through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 85

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
the performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the specific identification information;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
the presentation control means starts the variable display of the decorative identification information during a period from when the state of the light emitting means of the game control means becomes the initial state to when the light emitting means of the game control means becomes the final state when the game medium passes through a starting area in a situation where information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the storage means;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then executing a variable display of decorative identification information, it is possible to allow the player to recognize by multiple means that the variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area.In particular, by starting the variable display of decorative identification information between the time when the variable display of specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 86, Figure 87

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side can be switched from an initial state to a final state, and the switching can be executed multiple times;
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored, the display means can be caused to display the specific display,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
said performance control means, when the game medium passes through a starting area in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in said storage means, starts displaying said specific display during a period from when the state of said performance control means side light emitting means becomes said initial state to when it becomes said final state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side and then displaying a specific display, it is possible for multiple means to recognize that a variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting to display a specific display between the time when the display mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side becomes the initial mode and the time when it becomes the final mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only a switching of the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side can be switched from an initial state to a final state, and the switching can be executed multiple times;
The display means can display a variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
said performance control means, when the game medium passes through a starting area in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in said storage means, starts the variable display of said decorative identification information during the period from when the state of said performance control means side light emitting means becomes said initial state to when it becomes said final state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the performance control means side and then variable displaying the decorative identification information, it is possible for multiple means to recognize that variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the variable display of the decorative identification information between the time when the display mode of the light-emitting means on the performance control means side becomes the initial mode and the time when it becomes the final mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only switching of the mode of the light-emitting means on the performance control means side is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 86, Figure 87

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is moved from a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a special number of times according to the switching period;
when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information on the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a specific number of times less than the special number of times in accordance with the switching period to terminate the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating an impression of a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display, rather than a moving image that switches a special number of times with an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area that is executed in response to the end of the variable display, it is possible to create an impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52, Figure 81 to Figure 84
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "switching period" corresponds to the "image update period of 33 ms" in this embodiment.
The "special number of times" corresponds to "10 times (shift animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the shift animation (10 frames)" in this embodiment,
The "specific number of times" corresponds to "five times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames (five frames) of the end animation" in this embodiment.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
in a state in which information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, when a game medium passes through the starting area, an image corresponding to the specific indication is switched a predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching period, and the image corresponding to the specific indication is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information on the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is terminated, an image corresponding to the specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area is switched a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching period, and the display of the image corresponding to the specific display is terminated.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating a video by switching a predetermined number of times an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, rather than a moving image by switching a specific number of times an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area in response to the end of the variable display, it is possible to create a strong impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52, Figure 72, Figure 73
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number of times" corresponds to "20 times (number of times corresponding to the number of frames of the appearing animation)" in this embodiment.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
in a situation where information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through the starting area, an image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching cycle to display the image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area; and when information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display area, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times less than the predetermined number in accordance with the switching cycle to move and display the image corresponding to the specific display from the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating a video by switching an image corresponding to a specific display a predetermined number of times at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area executed in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, rather than a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display, it is possible to create an impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 52

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display N times (N≧30) according to the switching period as one period,
when information relating to a variable display of a specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display area, an image corresponding to the specific display is moved and displayed from a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a player has many opportunities to view a moving image in which an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area is displayed N times, a smooth moving image can be created by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, and since a player has few opportunities to view a moving image in which an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display is moved, a sense of speed can be conveyed while conveying the movement by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: FIG. 52 and modified examples

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display N times (N≧30) according to the switching period as one period,
when variable display of specific identification information is not being executed and information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, an image corresponding to the specific indication is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image corresponding to the specific indication a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the technician has many opportunities to view the moving image, which has N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the first pending memory area, by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a smooth moving image can be produced.Since the technician has few opportunities to view the moving image, which is generated by switching images corresponding to a specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the first pending memory area in response to the game medium passing through the starting area, by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a sense of speed can be created while conveying that a new specific display is being displayed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: FIG. 52 and modified examples

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display N times (N≧30) according to the switching period as one period,
when the variable display of the specific identification information is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period, thereby terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a player has many opportunities to view a moving image in which an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area is displayed N times, a smooth moving image can be created by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle.Since a player has few opportunities to view a moving image resulting from switching of an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area in response to the end of the variable display, a reduced number of switches according to the switching cycle can convey the end while creating a sense of speed, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: FIG. 52 and modified examples

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of embodiment 49 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means,
The performance control means is capable of performing control to cause the display means to display a specific display when information regarding a variable display of the specific identification information is stored,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game medium passed through the starting area, the display of the specific indication is displayed in a manner with low transparency at the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, thereby moving the specific indication displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area,
when information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, after the predetermined period of time from when the game medium has passed through the starting area, the specific display is started to be displayed in a high-transparency manner at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then, the specific display is displayed by executing an appearance animation that changes the high-transparency manner to a low-transparency manner.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in a situation where a variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the display mode of the specific display is made to have a low transmittance and is easy to recognize in order to quickly communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area, and in a situation where there is no reserved memory but the variable display is being executed, attention is also being paid to the variable display, so in order to prevent a sudden display making it difficult to understand that a specific display has been made, the display is made gradually, so that the appearance animation can be used to communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 54, 55, 58, 59, and 65

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the demonstration display can be displayed,
when the game medium passes through the starting area while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display of the demonstration display is terminated, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and a moving animation is started in the next switching cycle in which the specific display is displayed, for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by clearing the demonstration display and temporarily displaying the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then moving it to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area, it is possible to easily communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area during the demonstration display, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 86, Figure 87
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "demonstration display" corresponds to the "demonstration display performance" in this embodiment.

[Mode 51]
The gaming machine of embodiment 51 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display guidance displays regarding the performance settings,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the guidance display can be displayed,
when the game medium passes through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, the display of the guidance display is terminated, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and a moving animation is started in the next switching cycle in which the specific display is displayed, for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by clearing the guidance display and temporarily displaying the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then moving it to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area, it is possible to easily communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 90, Figure 91
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "guidance display" corresponds to the "menu guide display" in this embodiment.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
the storage means has a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, as an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the game control means is executing the variable display of the specific identification information and the game medium passes through a start area, the game control means stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the reserved memory area, transmits a specific command corresponding to the stored information to the performance control means, and then executes a process of updating the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side;
The performance control means executes a process of updating the mode of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the presentation control means, and then performs processing to update the state of the game control means side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means itself, thereby making it possible to prevent too much of a gap between changes in the state of the game control means side light-emitting means even when changes are made sequentially, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 42, Figure 72 to Figure 76
In this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending memory count notification command" in this embodiment.

[Mode 53]
The gaming machine of embodiment 53 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
the storage means has a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, as an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When the game medium passes through a start area while the variable display of the specific identification information is being performed, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved memory area, and then, based on the start of the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage is moved to the variable display memory area, a specific command corresponding to the movement is transmitted to the performance control means, and a process of updating the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is executed;
The performance control means executes a process of updating the mode of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the presentation control means, and then performs a process to update the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side which is controlled by the game control means itself, so that even when changes in the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side corresponding to a reduction in the number of reserved memories are made sequentially, it is possible to prevent a period of time from being too long, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 42, Figure 72 to Figure 76
In this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending memory count notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A main status indicator light;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When executing the variable display of the specific identification information, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated;
If the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information related to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the storage means based on the passing, and then a variable display period setting process is performed to set a variable display period of the variable display of specific identification information based on the passing, and then the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated, and then a subtraction process is started to subtract the variable display period of the specific identification information set in the variable display period setting process.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means on the game control means side is first set to a mode that indicates the execution of a variable display, and then the variable display period is subtracted, so that it is possible to subtract the variable display period while showing the player that a variable display is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 42, Figure 72 to Figure 76

(Correspondence between the present invention and this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the "jackpot game state" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention, the "CPU 103" corresponds to the "game control means" of the present invention, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance execution means" of the present invention, the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and the "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "reserved memory means" of the present invention, the "number of first special symbol reserved memories and the number of second special symbol reserved memories being four" corresponds to the "predetermined number" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "start mode" of the present invention. Furthermore, the ``hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation'' corresponds to the ``completion mode'' of the present invention, the ``hold display displayed as the 2nd frame image of the appearance animation to the 19th frame image of the appearance animation'' corresponds to the ``intermediate mode'' of the present invention, the ``shift animation'' corresponds to the ``hold shift'' of the present invention, the ``330 ms which is the display execution period of the shift animation'' corresponds to the ``specific period'' of the present invention, and the ``660 ms which is the display execution period of the appearance animation'' corresponds to the ``predetermined period'' of the present invention.

In addition, "the timing less than 33 ms before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "immediately before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" in this invention, and "the timing less than 33 ms after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "immediately after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" in this invention.

In addition, the "flash effect when winning" corresponds to the "winning effect" of this invention.

In addition, a "white hold display caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal hold display" of the present invention, a "blue and red hold displays caused by a decision to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "special hold display" of the present invention, a "white hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal start mode" of the present invention, a "hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the first frame of the shift animation caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal completion mode" of the present invention, and a "hold display displayed from the second frame of the appearance animation caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal completion mode" of the present invention. The "pending display displayed as the 19th frame image" corresponds to the "normal midway mode" of the present invention, the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 1st frame image of the appearance animation when it is decided to execute a pending change performance" corresponds to the "special start mode" of the present invention, the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when it is decided to execute a pending change performance" corresponds to the "special completion mode" of the present invention, and the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 2nd to 19th frame images of the appearance animation when it is decided not to execute a pending change performance" corresponds to the "special midway mode" of the present invention.

In addition, "presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode" of the present invention, "presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode" of the present invention, the "cube pending display in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode pending display" of the present invention, the "regular octahedron pending display in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode pending display" of the present invention, the "pending display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode start mode" of the present invention, the "pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the first frame image of the shift animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention, and the "pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the first frame image of the shift animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention. "The hold display displayed as the image of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode midway mode" of the present invention, "the hold display displayed as the image of the 1st frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode start mode" of the present invention, "the hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the 1st frame of the shift animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode completion mode" of the present invention, and "the hold display displayed as the image of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode midway mode" of the present invention.

In addition, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance control means" of the present invention, the "RAM 102, particularly the game control data holding area 001SG150" corresponds to the "storage means" of the present invention, the "eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention, the "LEDs constituting the special pattern unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first hold display device 25A and the second hold display device 25B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and the "LEDs constituting the first sub-hold display device 151A and the second sub-hold display device 151B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention. ED" corresponds to the "performance control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, the "entry (storage area) of reserved number "0" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" corresponds to the "variable display memory area" of the present invention, the "entry (storage area) of reserved numbers "1-4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" corresponds to the "first reserved memory area" of the present invention, and the "first start winning port (winning ball device 6A) and the second start winning port (variable winning ball device 6B)" correspond to the "start area" of the present invention.

In addition, the "image display device 5" corresponds to the "display means" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U" corresponds to the "reserved ball count display" of the present invention.

In addition, "the LEDs constituting the special pattern unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, "the state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "initial state" of the present invention, "the state in which the eighth LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "final state" of the present invention, and "active display" corresponds to the "specific display" of the present invention.

In addition, the "first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "multiple reserved memory areas including the first reserved memory area" of the present invention.

In addition, the "image update period of 33 ms" corresponds to the "switching period" of the present invention, the "10 times (shift animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the shift animation (10 frames)" corresponds to the "special number of times" of the present invention, the "5 times (end animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the end animation (5 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention, and the "20 times (appearance animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the appearance animation (20 frames)" corresponds to the "predetermined number of times" of the present invention.

In addition, the "demo display effect" corresponds to the "demonstration display" of the present invention, the "menu guidance display" corresponds to the "guidance display" of the present invention, and the "pending memory count notification command" corresponds to the "specific command" of the present invention.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

A special symbol unit 201 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 18(A), the special symbol unit 201 is composed of a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, a normal symbol display device 20, a normal reserve indicator 25C, a round number indicator 26, a win indicator light 27, a right hit indicator light 28, and a status indicator light 29.

(Special pattern display device)
The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of eight LEDs, and the second special symbol display device 4B is also composed of eight LEDs. Each of the eight LEDs is called specific identification information (special symbol). A group of eight LEDs is called multiple types of specific identification information (multiple types of special symbols). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are devices that variably display multiple types of special symbols when a winning entry occurs in the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole (when the starting condition is met), and indicate a "jackpot" or a "loss" when the combination of special symbols (combination of the eight LEDs being lit or turned off) becomes a combination that is predetermined by the pachinko game machine 1.

(Variable display of special symbols)
The "variable display" of the special symbols indicates the period until the special symbol combination appears by turning on and off the eight LEDs according to a predetermined rule. Note that the variable display may also be expressed as a fluctuating display or a fluctuating.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." In addition, a special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

(Reserved indicator)
The first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B are each composed of two LEDs. The first reserved indicator 25A displays the first reserved memory number by the number of LEDs lit and the lighting state, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number by the number of LEDs lit and the lighting state. For example, the first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B indicate that the number of reserved memories is one by lighting only the first LED, indicate that the number of reserved memories is two by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicate that the number of reserved memories is three by blinking the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicate that the number of reserved memories is four by blinking both the first LED and the second LED.

(Normal pattern display)
The normal symbol display 20 is composed of four LEDs, and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

The regular game reserve indicator 25C is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the regular game reserve memory number, which is the number of regular games that are reserved for execution, by the number of lit LEDs and the lighting state. For example, the regular game reserve indicator 25C indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 1 by lighting only the first LED, indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 2 by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 3 by blinking the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 4 by blinking both the first and second LEDs.

(Round number indicator)
The round number indicator 26 is composed of five LEDs, and the combination of on and off of these LEDs indicates the number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. The win indicator light 27, the right-hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29 are each one LED. The win indicator light 27 is an LED that lights up during a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later, the right-hit indicator light 28 is an LED that lights up during a time-saving state, a special probability state, and a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later, and the status indicator lights are LEDs that light up during a time-saving state and a special probability state, which will be described later.

(Image display device)
As shown in Fig. 1, an image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (holding memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding to a variable display. In this embodiment, a hold memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern hold memory display area in which a first hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern hold memory display area in which a second hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the hold memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the first special pattern when the game state is in a normal state, and is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the second special pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

(Winning ball device)
A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started. Note that the winning ball device 6A in this embodiment is positioned so that game balls shot by the player that flow down the area to the left of the image display device 5 (left game area) can win a prize.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), normal winning holes 10 are provided that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the normal winning holes 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the normal prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the normal winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, winning into the start port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning. In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged so that, among the game balls shot by the player, game balls that flow down the area to the right of the image display device 5 (right game area) can win, and game balls that flow down the area to the left of the image display device 5 (left game area) cannot win or have difficulty winning.

(Passing gate)
A passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

(Outlet)
In addition to the above configuration, a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls and a number of obstacle nails are provided on the surface of the game board 2. At the bottom of the game area, an outlet is provided to take in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

(Other production equipment)
Speakers 8L, 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. The speaker 8R is located behind the character decoration 101. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the gaming board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are composed of LEDs (see FIG. 2). The various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variable display time (period during which the special symbol is changed) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol change time (period during which the regular symbol is changed) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the change efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed to make the probability of the display result being a "jackpot" higher than in the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, since it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot." The details will be described later, but the probability variable state in this embodiment is a game state in which the average special symbol variable display time is shorter than in the time-saving state.

In other words, the normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the first special symbol is variably displayed by the player mainly by shooting the game ball toward the game area on the left side of the image display device 5 (left game area), and the time-saving state and the probability change state in this embodiment are game states in which the second special symbol is variably displayed by the player mainly by shooting the game ball toward the game area on the right side of the image display device 5 (right game area). Also, the jackpot game state in this embodiment is a game state in which the player mainly shoots the game ball toward the game area on the right side of the image display device 5 (right game area) to make the game ball enter the jackpot opening, thereby obtaining the payout of many prize balls.

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the player shoots the game ball mainly toward the left game area, allowing the game ball to win in the first start winning slot, but making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to win in the second start winning slot. The time-saving state and probability-change state in this embodiment are game states in which the player shoots the game ball mainly toward the right game area, allowing the game ball to win in the second start winning slot, but making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to win in the first start winning slot.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Figures 2 and 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a serial communication circuit 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes an input port 105a to which various signals from, for example, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the specific area switch 24, the normal winning port switch 25, and a magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, proximity sensor, and frame proximity sensor (not shown) for detecting errors are input via a switch circuit 110, and an output port 105b to which signals for controlling (driving) the solenoids 81, 82 and the various displays, display devices, and indicator lights that make up the special chart unit 201 are output (transmitted) via an output circuit 111.

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the specific area switch 24, and the normal winning port switch 25, and transmits them to the input port 105a. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

In this embodiment, the gate switch 21 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the first start port switch 22A is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the first start entry port, the second start port switch 22B is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the second start entry port, the count switch 23 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the large entry port, the specific area switch 24 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided within the large entry port, and the normal entry port switch 25 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal entry port 10.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (such as a signal to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the output circuit 111 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The serial communication circuit 106 communicates serially with the CPU (performance control CPU 120 in the case of the performance control board 12) of each control board (for example, a payout control board or performance control board 12, not shown) in a data format using full duplex, asynchronous and standard NRZ (non-return zero) coding. The serial communication circuit 106 includes a transmitting section that transmits various data (for example, a payout signal (a prize ball number command) or a performance control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and a receiving section that receives various data (for example, a prize ball ACK command) from the microcomputer of each control board.

In addition, an external RAM 107 for temporarily storing data to be processed by the game control microcomputer 100 is also provided on the main board 11 in this embodiment. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main board 11 is also connected to a setting key switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value setting state in which the setting value can be set, a setting changeover switch that functions as a touch switch for changing the setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) described later in the setting value setting state, a door/frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3, and a display monitor that can display the base value of this pachinko game machine. The setting key switch, setting changeover switch, and display monitor are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 so that they cannot be operated by the player.

A payout control board (not shown) is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. The payout control board is connected to a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor.

The payout control board is also connected to a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls a launching device capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether or not the touch ring has been detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device are also input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a performance based on a detection signal (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicates the content of the operation) from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. In addition, a vibration motor 36 is provided in the push button 31B. The vibration motor 36 is connected to the performance control board 12, and can be driven by receiving a drive signal from the performance control CPU 120. In other words, the push button 31B in this embodiment may vibrate when the vibration motor 36 is driven.

Furthermore, a performance display unit 202 is provided at the lower right position of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 18(C), the performance display unit 202 is composed of a first performance indicator light 152A and a second performance indicator light 152B, a first sub-hold indicator 151A and a second sub-hold indicator 151B, and a right hit lamp 153.

The first performance indicator light 152A is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the second performance indicator light 152B is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. Each of these is composed of one LED.

The first sub-reserved indicator 151A is an indicator for making it possible to specify the number of reserved first special charts, and the second sub-reserved indicator 151B is an indicator for making it possible to specify the number of reserved second special charts. Each of these is composed of two LEDs, and the number of reserved first special charts or the number of reserved second special charts can be displayed depending on the number of LEDs that are lit and the lighting state of these LEDs. For example, the first sub-reserved indicator 151A or the second sub-reserved indicator 151B indicates that the number of reserved special charts is one by lighting only the first LED, indicates that the number of reserved special charts is two by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicates that the number of reserved special charts is three by flashing the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicates that the number of reserved special charts is four by flashing both the first and second LEDs.

The right hit lamp 153 is a single LED that lights up during the time-saving state, the special state, and the jackpot game state.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, so the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 5, the VRAM area includes an active display image drawing area for drawing and arranging an active display in the active display area 5F and a first reserved display that moves as a shift animation from the reserved memory display area 5U toward the active display area 5F, a first reserved display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a first reserved display according to the game status in the reserved memory display area 5U and a second reserved display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the first reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U, and a second reserved display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a second reserved display according to the game status in the reserved memory display area 5U. A second hold display image drawing area is provided for drawing and arranging a hold display and a third hold display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the second hold display in the hold memory display area 5U, a third hold display image drawing area is provided for drawing and arranging a third hold display according to the game status in the hold memory display area 5U and a fourth hold display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U, and a fourth hold display image drawing area is provided for drawing and arranging a fourth hold display according to the game status in the hold memory display area 5U.

In this embodiment, in addition to the images drawn and arranged in the active display image drawing area and the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by superimposing images drawn and arranged in a background image drawing area for drawing and placing a background image, and a decorative pattern image drawing area for drawing and placing a decorative pattern image. Also, as shown in FIG. 5, in the active display image drawing area and the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, the display priority of the image drawn in the active display image drawing area is set to the highest, the image drawn in the first pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area, the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the first pending display image drawing area, the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the fourth pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area.

In other words, of the images related to the hold display and active display, the image displayed in the display position of the fourth hold display is the image displayed at the lowest level, the image displayed in the display position of the third hold display and the image of the fourth hold display moving toward the display position of the third hold display are images displayed in a higher level (priority display) than the image displayed in the display position of the fourth hold display, and the image displayed in the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display are images displayed in a higher level (priority display) than the image displayed in the display position of the third hold display and the image of the fourth hold display moving toward the display position of the third hold display. The image displayed in the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display are images displayed (priority displayed) above the image displayed in the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display, and the image displayed in the display position of the active display (active display area 5F) and the image of the first hold display moving toward the display position of the active display are images displayed (priority displayed) above the image displayed in the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 6 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start specification that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start specification that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern specification command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 6(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 6(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change of the decorative pattern in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, probability variable state). Furthermore, the high probability, high base state may simply be called the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first special chart reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special chart reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second special chart reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special chart reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special charts can be specified. The first special chart reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port winning designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second special chart reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port winning designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and the second special chart reserved memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special chart game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the reserved memory number decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (prize-winning judgment result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning judgment result. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that indicates the result of the winning judgment as to whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability win). Command C6XXH is a miss presentation pattern command that indicates the result of the winning judgment as to whether the winning judgment result will be a reach in the losing variable display (whether a reach presentation will be executed) and which type of reach will be executed (whether a normal reach reach presentation or a super reach reach presentation will be executed).

Instead of the first special chart reserved memory number notification command or the second special chart reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command that notifies the total reserved memory number may be sent. In other words, the total reserved memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total reserved memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 7, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data are controlled to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, random number value MR6 for determining the normal chart display result, and random number value MR7 for determining the initial value of the random number values MR1 and MR6 mentioned above. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR7. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR7 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect is a random number value used to determine in advance whether or not a reach will occur in a variable display where the variable display is a miss, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example. The random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern is a random number value used to determine in advance the type of super reach that will be executed, whether it will be a normal reach or a super reach, when the variable display is a miss and the variable display is a reach, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example.

The random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and can take a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR7 for determining the initial value is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR1 and the random number value MR7 described above, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table 22, when the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, referring to Figure 9 (B), the types of jackpots in this embodiment are explained. In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "jackpot A", where the V-lid opens short during a round, "jackpot B", where the V-lid opens long during a round, and "jackpot C".

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated four times (so-called 4 rounds). The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated four times (so-called 4 rounds). The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated ten times (so-called 10 rounds).

Regardless of whether the jackpot is "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," or "Jackpot C," when the game ball passes through the V area, the state after the jackpot ends will be in a special state. The special state is a state with a high probability of a jackpot for 100 spins. In this embodiment, the normal state has a jackpot probability of about 1/300, and the special state has a jackpot probability of about 1/82. By being controlled to the special state, it is also controlled to a time-saving state.

Whether it is a "jackpot A," "jackpot B," or "jackpot C," the game ball does not pass through the V area, and the state after the jackpot ends is the time-saving state. The time-saving state is a state in which controls such as shortening fluctuations and shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map are performed. The probability of a jackpot is about 1/300, the same as the normal state.

In "Jackpot A", the V-lid is short-open, so even if the player hits the ball firmly to the right, the ball is designed to almost never pass through the V-area, so "Jackpot A" is essentially a jackpot that is controlled in a time-saving state.

Since the V-lid is long open for "Big Hit B" and "Big Hit C", if the player hits the ball firmly to the right, the ball is designed to pass almost through the V-area, so "Big Hit B" and "Big Hit C" are essentially big hits that are controlled to a high probability state.

After being controlled to the time-saving state and the probability of winning, the fluctuations in Special Chart 2 become the main focus, and if a jackpot occurs on Special Chart 2, "jackpot C" is 100% confirmed, so jackpots from the second onwards (so-called consecutive win state) are the most favorable jackpots, and the gameplay encourages players to aim for successive jackpots in the probability of winning state.

Figure 10 shows an example of the configuration of a miss performance judgment table stored in ROM 101. The miss performance judgment table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced when it is determined that the special chart display result is a "miss," to determine whether the miss performance should be non-reach or reach, that is, whether or not to execute a reach performance in the variable display, based on the random number value MR3 for miss performance judgment. For example, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 85, the miss performance is determined to be non-reach (reach performance is not executed), and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 86 to 100, the miss performance is determined to be reach (reach performance is executed).

Figures 11 (A) to 11 (C) show an example of the configuration of a variation pattern type determination table stored in ROM 101. The variation pattern type determination table is a table for determining whether the reach (variation pattern type) to be executed will be a normal reach, a super reach α, a super reach β, or a super reach γ when the miss performance determination table determines that the miss performance is a reach (executing a reach performance). In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 11 (A) to 11 (C), when the gaming state is normal (low probability, low base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table A and the value of the random number value MR4, when the gaming state is time-saving (low probability, high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table B and the value of the random number value MR4, and when the gaming state is high probability (high probability, high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table C and the value of the random number value MR4. In addition, determining the type of variation pattern to be normal reach means determining that a normal reach reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss, determining the type of variation pattern to be super reach α means determining that a super reach α reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss, determining the type of variation pattern to be super reach β means determining that a super reach β reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss, and determining the type of variation pattern to be super reach γ means determining that a super reach γ reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11(A), when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 95, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach α, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 96 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach β. Also, as shown in FIG. 11(B), when the game state is time-saving state (low probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach γ. Also, as shown in FIG. 11(C), when the game state is probability variable state (high probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach.

Figures 12 (A) to 12 (C) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the time-saving state (low probability high base state), or the probability change state (high probability high base state), and when the variable display result is "miss", a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the miss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), as shown in FIG. 12 (A), there are a variation pattern (PA1-1) in which the special chart variable display time is 12,000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-2) in which the special chart variable display time is 5,750 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is 3,750 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA2-1A) in which the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern (PA2-2B) in which the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display. A variation pattern (PA2-1B) in which a pseudo consecutive performance including a stop and a re-variable display is executed once, followed by a miss to a normal reach; a variation pattern (PA2-2A) in which the special chart variable display time is 60,000 ms, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once, followed by a miss to a super reach α via a normal reach; a variation pattern (PA2-2B) in which the special chart variable display time is 65,000 ms, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a miss to a super reach α via a normal reach; a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the special chart variable display time is 70,000 ms, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a miss to a super reach via a normal reach. A variation pattern (PA2-3A) in which the Chi-β misses, a variation pattern (PA2-3B) in which the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms, and after three pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach and then a super reach β miss, a variation pattern (PB1-1A) in which the special chart variable display time is 20,000 ms and a normal reach jackpot occurs, a variation pattern (PB1-1B) in which the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and after one pseudo consecutive performance is performed, a normal reach jackpot occurs, and a variation pattern (PB1-1B) in which the special chart variable display time is 60,000 ms, and after one pseudo consecutive performance is performed, a normal reach is followed by a super reach. There are variation patterns (PB1-2A) that result in a Super Reach α jackpot, a variation pattern (PB1-2B) where the special chart variable display time is 65,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, the normal reach results in a Super Reach α jackpot, a variation pattern (PB1-3A) where the special chart variable display time is 70,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, the normal reach results in a Super Reach β jackpot, and a variation pattern (PB1-3B) where the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms, and after three pseudo consecutive performances, the normal reach results in a Super Reach β jackpot.

In addition, when the game state is in the time-saving state (low probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 12 (B), there are a variation pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is 7000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-5) in which the special chart variable display time is 2000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA2-4A) in which the special chart variable display time is 10000 ms and the result is a normal reach miss after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed (PA2-4B), a variation pattern (PA2-5A) in which the special chart variable display time is 30000 ms and the result is a super reach γ miss after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed via a normal reach, and a variation pattern (PA2-5B) in which the special chart variable display time is 35000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed. There are variation patterns (PA2-5B) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a normal reach and a miss on the Super Reach γ; a variation pattern (PB1-4A) in which the special chart variable display time is 10,000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot; a variation pattern (PB1-4B) in which the special chart variable display time is 15,000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed; a variation pattern (PB1-5A) in which the special chart variable display time is 30,000 ms and results in a super reach γ jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed via a normal reach; and a variation pattern (PB1-5B) in which the special chart variable display time is 35,000 ms and results in a super reach γ jackpot after two pseudo consecutive performances are executed via a normal reach.

Furthermore, when the game state is a probability state (high probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 12(C), there are provided a variation pattern (PA1-6) in which the special chart variable display time is 3000 ms and results in a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-7) in which the special chart variable display time is 500 ms and results in a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA2-6) in which the special chart variable display time is 5000 ms and results in a normal reach miss, and a variation pattern (PB1-6) in which the special chart variable display time is 5000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot.

In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot being the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to be higher in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-reach, so that in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variable display time, the higher the probability of a jackpot being expected. Furthermore, when the game state is in the normal state, the probability of a jackpot being the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to be higher for Super Reach β than for Super Reach α.

In addition, in this embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined using the random number value MR5 for judging the fluctuation pattern, as well as the random number value MR3 for judging a miss performance and the random number value MR4 for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined using two or less random number values including the random number value MR5 for judging the fluctuation pattern, or may be determined using four or less random number values including the random number value MR5 for judging the fluctuation pattern.

Figures 13 to 16 are explanatory diagrams of the method of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, the miss performance, the variation pattern type, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 13 (A) to 13 (F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display (number of reserved memories of the same type) is one or less, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR5, and if the miss effect is a non-reach and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display is three, The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number MR5, and if the miss performance is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D and the value of the random number MR5, if the miss performance is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach α, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E and the value of the random number MR5, and if the miss performance is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach β, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F and the value of the random number MR5.

Also, as shown in Fig. 14(A) to Fig. 14(D), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is not a reach and the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table G and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is not a reach and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two or more, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table H and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a reach and the variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table I and the value of the random number value MR5, and if the miss effect is a reach and the variation pattern type is a super reach γ, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table J and the value of the random number value MR5.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 15(A) to Fig. 15(C), when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special pattern that executes the variable display is one or less, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table K and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two or more, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table L and the value of the random number value MR5, and if the miss effect is a reach and the variable pattern type is a normal reach, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table M and the value of the random number value MR5.

As shown in Figures 16(A) to 16(C), when the game state is normal (low probability low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR5, when the game state is time-saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR5, and when the game state is high probability state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number value MR5.

For example, as shown in Figures 13 (A) to 13 (F), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1A); If the value of MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1B); if the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2A); if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2B); if the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3A); if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3B).

Also, as shown in Figures 14 (A) to 14 (D), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table G is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table H is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-5); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table I is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 920, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be If the random number value MR5 is within the range of 921 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-4A). If the miss fluctuation pattern determination table J is selected, if the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 950, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5A). If the random number value MR5 is within the range of 951 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5B).

Also, as shown in Figures 15(A) to 15(C), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table K is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table L is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-7); and when miss fluctuation pattern determination table M is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1A), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 80, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1B), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 81 to 170, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern. If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2B), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 321 to 600, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3A), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 601 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 90, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4A), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 91 to 280, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4B), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 281 to 580, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A), and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 581 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(C), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6).

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may be different depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, the player can pay attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, which can increase the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17, the normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is lower than that of the special variable state, and is also a game state in which the average special symbol variable display time is the longest among the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special variable state. Also, the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is lower than that of the special variable state, and is a game state in which the average special symbol variable display time is shorter than that of the normal state and longer than that of the special variable state among the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special variable state. In this embodiment, the special probability state is a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (the probability of a jackpot) is higher than in the normal state or the time-saving state, and is the gaming state in which the average variable display time of the special symbol is the shortest among the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special probability state.

Here, the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 18B, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided with eight LEDs as described above, and the special symbols are composed of these LEDs. In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs to be lit are switched one by one every time 40 ms has passed, and the first LED starts to light again when 40 ms has passed since the eighth LED started to light. In other words, in this embodiment, the process in which the LEDs to be lit change in order from the first to the second, the third, ... the eighth is set as one cycle, and the variable display of the special symbols is executed by repeatedly cyclically lighting these LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 18(D), the first and second performance indicator lights 152A and 152B each have one LED, and these LEDs form the sub-patterns. In the first and second performance indicator lights 152A and 152B, the LEDs are switched on and off every 60 ms. In other words, in the first and second special pattern display devices 4A and 4B, one cycle is when the LED is turned on for 240 ms and off for 240 ms, and the cyclical lighting of these LEDs is repeatedly executed to execute the variable display of the sub-patterns.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 001SG150 as shown in FIG. 19 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 001SG150 shown in FIG. 19 includes a first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 001SG152, a game control timer setting unit 001SG153, a game control counter setting unit 001SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 001SG155.

The first special symbol buffer 001SG151A stores the pending data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started but in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, in the order of winning.

The second special symbol buffer 001SG151B stores the pending data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

As an example, the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The second special pattern buffer 001SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The numerical data for reserved number 0 in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B is data corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed, and the numerical data for reserved numbers 1 to 4 is data (reserved data) corresponding to the variable display of special patterns that have not yet been executed.

The reserved data stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR6 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The numerical data for reserved number 0 in the regular pattern reserved memory unit 001SG151C is data corresponding to the variable display of the regular pattern currently being executed, and the numerical data for reserved numbers 1 to 4 is data (reserved data) corresponding to the variable display of regular patterns that have not yet been executed.

The game control flag setting unit 001SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 001SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 001SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 001SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with a random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special chart display result, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR1, a random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of big win, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR2, a random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the type of miss performance, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR3, a random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR4, and a random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR5.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of the input port 105a. As shown in Figure 20, in input port 0, a signal from the count switch 23 is input to bit 1, a discharge port switch (not shown) is input to bit 2, a specific area switch 24 is input to bit 3, and a normal winning port switch 25 is input to bit 6. In input port 1, an out confirmation switch signal 1 is input to bit 2, an out confirmation switch signal 2 is input to bit 3, a magnet sensor signal is input to bit 5, and a frame radio wave sensor signal is input to bit 7. In input port 2, a board proximity sensor error signal is input to bit 2, a frame proximity sensor error signal is input to bit 3, a setting key switch is input to bit 4, a touch switch is input to bit 5, a door/frame opening switch is input to bit 6, and a signal from the clear switch is input to bit 7. In input port 3, a signal from the first start port switch 22A is input to bit 1, a second start port switch 22B is input to bit 2, and a signal from the gate switch 21 is input to bit 3. In addition, a power supply confirmation signal is input to bit 6, and a prize ball control signal RX0 is input to bit 7.

Figure 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for output port 105b. As shown in Figure 21, in output port DG1, bits 1 to 8 output signals to each LED that constitutes the first special symbol. In output port DG2, bits 1 to 8 output signals to each LED that constitutes the second special symbol.

In addition, in the output port DG3, a signal is output from bit 1 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 2 in the first special pattern (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the first reserve display 25A), from bit 2 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 2 in the second special pattern (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the second reserve display 25B), from bit 3 to the gate pass memory number indicator lamp 2 (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20), from bit 4 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 1 in the first special pattern (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the first reserve display 25A), from bit 5 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 1 in the second special pattern (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the second reserve display 25B), and from bit 6 to the gate pass memory number indicator lamp 1 (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20). Then, in the output port DG4, signals are output from bits 1 to 4 to each LED that makes up the normal pattern.

In addition, in output port DG5, bits 0 to 4 output signals to the LEDs that make up the round count indicator 26, bit 5 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the win indicator light 27, bit 6 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the right hit indicator light 28, and bit 7 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the status indicator light 29.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, for example a performance control data storage area 001SG190 as shown in Figure 22 (A). The performance control data storage area 001SG190 shown in Figure 22 (A) has a performance control flag setting unit 001SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 001SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 001SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 001SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 001SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A as shown in FIG. 22 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special chart being variably displayed. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special chart being variably displayed. When a start win occurs in the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first special pattern reserved memory number notification command or second special pattern reserved memory number notification command), a pattern designation command, and a miss performance pattern command, are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, reserved memory number notification command, pattern designation command, and miss performance pattern command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a memory area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a pending display flag, in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a winning time flash effect flag, in which a flag value indicating whether or not the winning time flash effect described below is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

When the execution of the hold change effect is not determined in the hold change effect determination process described below, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern, and when the execution of the hold change effect is determined, "1" (blue) or "2" (red) is set, which corresponds to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (e.g., blue or red) different from the normal display mode. After the hold change effect determination process is executed, the hold appearance animation process, dwell animation process, shift animation process, etc. described below are further executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a display mode corresponding to each hold display flag (for example, if the hold display flag value is "0", the shape is white according to the game status, if the hold display flag value is "1", the shape is blue according to the game status, and if the hold display flag value is "2", the shape is red according to the game status).

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 001SG194A for receiving the winning entry, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 001SG194A for receiving the winning entry. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command for designating the winning entry in the starting entry, the command for notifying the number of reserved memories, the command for designating the symbol, and the command for the losing performance pattern are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the command for designating the winning entry in the starting entry, the command for notifying the number of reserved memories, the command for designating the symbol, and the command for the losing performance pattern are sequentially stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 22(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 22(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in buffer number "1-0", and a reserved display is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the data stored in buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4". Also, when the game state is time-saving or high probability, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in buffer number "2-0", and a reserved display is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the data stored in buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4".

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), it is determined whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and whether the setting value confirmation condition is met based on the state of the setting key switch, etc. (step S4). If the setting value confirmation condition is met (step S4; Yes), the currently set setting value is displayed on the display monitor as a setting value confirmation process (step S5).

After the setting value confirmation process is executed, or if the setting value confirmation condition is not met (step S4; No), a recovery process (step S6) is executed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (step S12). The recovery process of step S8 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), it is determined whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and whether the setting value setting condition is met based on the state of the setting key switch, etc. (step S7). If the setting value setting condition is met (step S7; Yes), a setting value setting process is executed (step S8). In the setting value setting process of this embodiment, for example, the setting value that is set by operating the touch switch and the setting key switch can be set.

After the set value setting process is executed, or if the set value setting condition is not satisfied (step S7; No), a determination is made as to whether the set value confirmation condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation process is executed (steps 9 and 10) in the same manner as in steps S4 and S5. After the set value confirmation process is executed, or if the set value confirmation condition is not satisfied (step 9; No), an initialization process (step S11) is executed, and then a random number circuit setting process (step S12) is executed.

The initialization process in step S11 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S12), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S13), and permits the interrupt (step S14). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at a predetermined time (e.g., every 4 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing this game control main process, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of Figure 24. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 24 starts, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the specific area switch 24, and the normal winning port switch 25, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, a timer subtraction process (step S22) is executed to subtract various timer values related to the game (for example, the values of the normal symbol process timer, the start port 2 or more winning error invalid timer, the security information timer, the information output extension timer, and the illegal winning notification invalid timer), and then a start port 2 abnormal winning monitoring process (step S23) is executed to monitor whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning port, and a winning designation command based on the game ball having won in various winning ports and an error command indicating the abnormal winning based on the occurrence of the abnormal winning are sent to the performance control board 12. By executing a prize winning notification process (step S24) to notify the occurrence of a magnet error, a magnet error notification process (step S25) to notify the occurrence of a magnet error, a radio wave error notification process (step S26) to notify the occurrence of a radio wave error, a switch error notification process (step S27) and a switch abnormality error notification process (step S28) to check for breaks or loose wiring in various switches, and a discharged ball error notification process (step S29) to notify of a discharged ball error, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary depending on the diagnosis results. After this, a random number update process (step S30) for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result, an initial value determination random number update process (step S31) for updating the random number value MR7 for determining the initial value of the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR6, a special symbol process process (step S32) for performing variable display of the special symbol and control to the jackpot game state, a normal symbol process process (step S33) for performing variable display of the normal symbol, a role solenoid control process (step S34) for controlling the solenoids 81 and 82 as the opening control of the large prize winning port in the jackpot game state and the opening control of the second start prize winning port in response to a normal prize winning, 34), an information output process (step S35) that outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, a prize ball process (step S36) for awarding prize balls according to winnings in each winning slot, a display process (step S37) that sets data for turning on the LEDs that constitute the first reserve display 25A, the second reserve display 25B, and the normal reserve display 25C, and a test terminal process (step S38) that outputs a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. 8), an output process (step S39) for outputting contents related to the connection signal in the RAM area of output port 0 and contents related to the solenoid to the output port, a special symbol display control process (step S40) for setting special symbol display control data for performing variable display of special symbols according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data, a normal symbol display control process (step S41) for setting normal symbol display control data for performing variable display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data, a command set with information indicating an error state of the gaming machine, etc., in order to display an error state of the gaming machine, etc. to the performance control board 12 (step S42), a display control process (step S43) that controls the lighting of the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal symbol display device 20, the normal hold indicator 25C, etc. based on the data set in the output buffer, a setting key confirmation process (step S44) that confirms the state of the setting key switch, and a performance display monitor control process (step S45) that displays the base value, etc. on the display monitor provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and then allows an interrupt (step S46), and ends the game control timer interrupt process.

(Switch processing)
Next, the switch processing (step S21) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. In this embodiment, when the on state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is indeed on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is started. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 102 used in the switch processing. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous (for example, 4 ms ago) switch on/off determination result is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of the port 3 input this time are stored. The switch on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when the switch on is detected, and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when the switch off is detected.

Figure 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch process in step S21. In the switch process, the CPU 103 first inputs data input to input port 3 (step S51) and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S52).

Next, the initial value of the wait counter formed in RAM 102 is set (step 53), and the value of the wait counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (steps S54, S55).

When the wait counter value becomes 0, data from input port 3 is input again (step S56), and a logical AND is taken for each bit between the input data and the data set in the port buffer (step S57). The result of the logical AND is then set in the port buffer (step S58). Through the processing of steps S53 to S58, only bits that are "1" both times, out of the two input data input from input port 0 with a time interval of approximately [initial value of wait counter x (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], become "1" in the port buffer. In other words, if the switch detection signal remains on for a predetermined period of [initial value of wait counter x (processing time of steps S54 and S55)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes "1".

The CPU 103 then performs an exclusive OR operation on each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data currently set in the port buffer (step S59). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous (e.g., 4 ms ago) switch on/off determination result differs from the switch on/off determination result currently determined to be on becomes "1". The CPU 103 then performs a logical AND operation on each bit between the result of the exclusive OR operation and the data currently set in the port buffer (step S60). As a result, of the bits corresponding to the switches for which the previous (e.g., 4 ms ago) switch on/off determination result differs from the switch on/off determination result currently determined to be on (based on the result of the exclusive OR operation), only the bit corresponding to the switch currently determined to be on (based on the logical AND operation) remains as "1".

Then, the CPU 103 sets the result of the logical AND operation in step S60 in the switch-on buffer (step S61), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the result of the operation in step S108 is set in the previous port buffer (step S62).

By the above process, among the switches that have been continuously in the on state for a predetermined period of time, the bit corresponding to the switch whose previous on/off determination result (e.g., 4 ms ago) was off, i.e., the switch that changed from the off state to the on state, is set to "1" in the switch-on buffer.

(Random number update process)
Next, the random number update process (step S30) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process. In the random number update process, the CPU 103 first identifies the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (the value of the random number value MR1) (step 71), and determines whether the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display has reached the maximum value (step S72). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display has not reached the maximum value (step S72; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display is incremented by +1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S73). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display has reached the maximum value (step S72; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display is set to the minimum value of 1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S74).

In step S75, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S75). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display are the same value (step S76). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display are the same value (step S76; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display, that is, the random number value MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number value MR1 for determining the result of the special drawing display, is extracted (step S77), and the extracted random number value MR7 value is set in the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S78), and the extracted random number value MR7 value is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S79).

After execution of step S79, or if the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display is not the same as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S76; N), the CPU 103 identifies the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display (the value of the random number MR6) (step 80) and determines whether the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display has reached its maximum value (step S81). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display has not reached its maximum value (step S81; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S82). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display has reached its maximum value (step S81; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display is set to the minimum value of 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S83).

In step S84, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S84). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display are the same value (step S85). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display are the same value (step S85; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display, that is, the random number value MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number value MR6 for determining the result of the normal map display, is extracted (step S86), the extracted random number value MR7 value is set to the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S87), and the extracted random number value MR7 value is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S88), and the random number update process is terminated. Furthermore, if the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display is not the same as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S85; N), the random number update process ends without executing steps S86 to S88.

In this embodiment, the random number value MR1 for determining the special map display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal map display result both take values between 1 and 65536, so in the above step S74, the value of the random number counter for determining the special map display result is set to 1, and in the above step S83, the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result is set to 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of values that the random number value MR1 for determining the special map display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal map display result can be set to 0 to 65535, and in the above step S74, the value of the random number counter for determining the special map display result can be set to 0, and in the above step S83, the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result can be set to 0.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S32 shown in Fig. 24 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the game ball has entered either the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole, that is, whether a start winning has occurred, by referring to the input port 3 shown in Fig. 20 (step S100). If the game ball has entered either the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole (step S100; Y), the start hole switch passing process is executed (step S101).

In the start port switch passing process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of RAM 102, and update the reserved memory count. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the fluctuation pattern, and stored as the reserved information. In addition, a process may be executed to predict the display result and the fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. In addition, when the reserved information and the reserved memory count are stored, a performance control command is sent to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory count, and the predictive judgment.

After executing the start gate switch passing process in step S101, or if a game ball has not entered either the first start gate or the second start gate (step S100; N), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S116 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each process of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S116), a process is performed in which a performance control command corresponding to each process is sent to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

In addition, in the normal processing of special symbols, a process (variation pattern setting) is also performed in which the variation pattern is determined to be one of several types using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on the result of a pre-determination of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot."

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (variable special display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "1". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern variable display time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol stop process includes a process for setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the variation of the special symbol and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and if the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", and the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process of the large prize opening in step S113 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "3". This pre-opening process of the large prize opening includes a process for setting the large prize opening to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the large prize opening is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period during which the large prize opening is opened and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "4" and the pre-opening process of the large prize opening is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "4", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start switch passing process)
29 is a flow chart showing the start port switch passing process (S101) shown in FIG. 28. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start port switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A (001SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (001SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (001SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first special symbol reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first special symbol reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 001SGS102 is not the upper limit (001SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is set to "0" (001SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 001SGS101 (001SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 001SGS102 (001SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (001SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (001SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (001SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by reading the second special symbol reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second special symbol reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. When the second special symbol reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 001SGS105 (001SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is set to "2" (001SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 001SGS103 and 001SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (001SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved special symbol memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved special symbol memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved special symbol memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is established. In addition, the second reserved special symbol memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (001SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 001SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, a random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, a random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and a random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, and uses the extracted random number value MR1 as the special chart display result judgment. The extracted random number MR2 is stored in the fixed random number buffer 001SG155A, the extracted random number MR2 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of big win, the extracted random number MR3 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the miss performance, the extracted random number MR4 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the extracted random number MR5 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern (001SGS109 to 001SGS118).

The CPU 103 also sets the transfer destinations of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B from the start port buffer value and the reserved memory count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (001SGS119). Then, the CPU 103 transfers the random numbers MR1 to MR5 stored in the special pattern display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss performance determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E to the transfer destinations set in step 001SGS19 (001SGS120).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a miss performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 001SGS109 to 001SGS120, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display results of the special symbol or decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and stores it as reserved information (reserved memory).

In other words, in the start port switch passing processing of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 93 (A), the CPU 103 extracts the values of random number values MR1 to MR5 based on the occurrence of a winning entry into the first start port, and temporarily stores these extracted random number values MR1 to MR5 in the random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special chart display result, the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of jackpot, the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the miss performance, the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern, all within the game control buffer setting unit 001SGS155. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the CPU 103 transfers the random number values MR1 to MR5 stored in the random number buffer 001SG155A for determining special symbol display results, the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining jackpot type, the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining miss performance, the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining fluctuation pattern type, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for determining fluctuation pattern to the top of the empty entries among the entries with reserved numbers "1" to "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, and stores them as reserved memory.

In the example of Figure 93, the storage and transfer of the random number values MR1 to MR5 when a win occurs in the first starting port is explained, but when a win occurs in the second starting port, the random number values MR1 to MR5 stored in the special symbol display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss performance determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E are simply transferred to the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, so the explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 29, the CPU 103 executes the winning performance process (001SGS122) and then transmits the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (001SGS123), for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS126), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (001SGS124; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS125), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

(Winning performance processing)
FIG. 30(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 001SGS122 in FIG. 29 as a winning performance process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, a determination is made by a normal special symbol process described later as to whether or not the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In addition, in a variable pattern setting process described later, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning performance process of step 001SGS112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot" and which of the variable display modes of the decorative patterns will result in a miss performance pattern, and based on the result of this determination, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning performance process shown in FIG. 30(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example by checking the state of the time-saving flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 (step 001SGS131). In the process of step 001SGS131, for example, it is sufficient to identify whether the set value is set to a normal value (for example, "1"). Also, if an abnormal value is set as the set value, a process may be executed to output a command to the outside, indicating that the abnormal value has been set.

Following the processing of step 001SGS131, the CPU 103 selects and sets a special chart display result judgment table (step 001SGS132). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment extracted in step 001SGS109 of FIG. 29 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 001SGS133). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 001SGS132 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 001SGS133 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 001SGS133; N), the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss", is transmitted (step 001SGS134), and the miss performance determination table shown in Figure 10 is selected (step 001SGS135). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for miss performance determination extracted in step 001SGS113 in Figure 29 is within the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136). If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is within the non-reach judgment range (step 001SGS136; Y), a miss presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the non-reach (see FIG. 30(B)) is sent and the winning presentation processing is terminated (step 001SGS144); if the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is outside the non-reach judgment range (step 001SGS136; N), it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is set, that is, whether or not the game state is a probability change state (high probability high base state) (step 001SGS137).

If the probability variable flag is set (step 001SGS137; Y), the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS141) by setting the fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11(C), and if the probability variable flag is not set (step 001SGS137; N), the process further determines whether the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state) (step 001SGS138). If the time-saving flag is not set (step 001SGS138; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS139) by setting the fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11(A), and
If the time-saving flag is set (step 001SGS138; Y), the fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11(B) is set and the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS140).

In step 001SGS142, the CPU 103 determines the miss presentation pattern based on the variation pattern type determination table set in any of steps 001SGS139 to 001SGS141 and the numerical data of the random number value MR4 (step 001SGS42). If the numerical data of the random number value MR4 is within the range of the determination value for normal reach, it transmits a miss presentation pattern command corresponding to normal reach, and if the numerical data of the random number value MR4 is within the range of the determination value for super reach α, super reach β, or super reach γ, it transmits a miss presentation pattern command corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 30(B)) to the presentation control board 12, and ends the winning presentation processing (step 001SGS143).

In addition, if the numerical data of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step 001SGS133 (step 001SGS133; Y), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the numerical data of the random number value MR2 and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A) (step 001SGS145), and transmits a designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type to the performance control board 12, and ends the winning performance processing (step 001SGS146).

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 28 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 31, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 001SGS151). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 001SGS151, it is sufficient to read the second special symbol reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the number of reserved second special charts is other than "0" in step 001SGS151 (step 001SGS151; N), the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 001SGS153), and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS157.

On the other hand, if the second special pattern reserved memory count is "0" (step 001SGS151; Y), it is further determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory count is "0" (step 001SGS154). The first special pattern reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 001SGS154, the first special pattern reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; N), the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 001SGS156), and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS157. As a result, the special chart game using the second special chart is started in priority over the special chart game using the first special chart.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

In the process of step 001SGS157, the special drawing reserved memory number count value according to the variable special drawing designation buffer value is decremented by 1. For example, if the variable special drawing designation buffer value is "1", the first special drawing reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and if the variable special drawing designation buffer value is "2", the first
The special reserved memory count value should be reduced by 1.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol determination process (step 001SGS158) to determine whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step 001SGS159) to determine the fluctuation pattern, and then updates the special symbol process flag value to a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process and ends the normal special symbol processing (step 001SGS160).

If the number of reserved first special symbols is 0 in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; Y), the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands (e.g., a demo display performance designation command) to execute a demo display performance and ends the normal special symbol processing (step 001SGS161). If the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands to execute a demo display performance in step 001SGS61, the variable display of the special symbols is in a state in which it is possible to execute the variable display of the special symbols, but the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are 0, so the machine enters a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed.

(Special pattern determination process)
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol determination process shown in Fig. 31. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 first executes a special symbol buffer shift process (step 001SGS171). The special symbol buffer shift process, for example, as shown in Fig. 33, determines whether the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", that is, whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 001SGS181).

If the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1" (step 001SGS181; Y), the entry contents of reserved number "1" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A shown in Figure 19 are overwritten with the entry contents of reserved number "0" (step 001SGS182). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "1" (step 001SGS183), the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" (step 001SGS184), the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" (step 001SGS185), and the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are cleared (step 001SGS186).

In this way, by executing the processing of steps 001SGS182 to 00SGS186, the higher entry of the reserved memory in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is shifted.

Then, a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which the numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR5 are stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is sent to the performance control board 12, and the special symbol buffer shift process is terminated (step 001SGS187).

On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2" (step 001SGS181; N), the entry contents of reserved number "1" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B shown in Figure 19 are overwritten with the entry contents of reserved number "0" (step 001SGS188). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "1" (step 001SGS189), the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" (step 001SGS190), the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" (step 001SGS191), and the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are cleared (step 001SGS192).

In this way, by executing the processing of steps 001SGS188 to 00SGS192, the higher entry of the reserved memory is shifted in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B.

Then, a second special symbol reserved memory count notification command according to the number of entries in which the numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR5 are stored in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is sent to the performance control board 12, and the special symbol buffer shift process is terminated (step 001SGS193).

In other words, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 94 (A) to 94 (E) and Figures 95 (A) to 95 (F), the CPU 103 first performs a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "1" to the entry with reservation number "0" in the special symbol buffer (first special symbol buffer 001SG151A in the example shown in Figures 94 and 95), regardless of the number of reserved memories stored. Next, the CPU 103 sequentially performs a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "2" to the entry with reservation number "1", a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "3" to the entry with reservation number "2", and a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "4" to the entry with reservation number "3".

As shown in FIG. 95(E), if the special pattern buffer process is executed when the number of reserved memories is four, executing the process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4" to the entry with reserved number "3" will result in the same data being present in the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4" (the data of the entry with reserved number "4" before the special pattern buffer process was executed is stored in both the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4"). For this reason, in the special pattern buffer process of this embodiment, the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4" are erased (cleared) at the end, thereby reducing the number of reserved memories.

Furthermore, in the special pattern buffer shift process in this embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is four, a situation will arise in which the same data exists in the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4" as shown in Figure 95 (E), so it is necessary to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4". However, as shown in Figure 94, when the number of reserved memories is three or less, there is no need to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4". However, if the processing content of the special pattern buffer shift process were to be different depending on the number of reserved memories stored, the amount of data required to execute the special pattern buffer shift process would increase. Therefore, in this embodiment, common processing is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories stored (a processing to copy the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "2" to the entry with reserved number "1", a processing to copy the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "3" to the entry with reserved number "2", a processing to copy the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4" to the entry with reserved number "3", and a processing to erase the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4"), thereby suppressing the increase in the amount of data required to execute the special pattern buffer shift process.

Returning to the special symbol determination process of FIG. 32, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR5 from the entry of reserved number "0" in the special symbol buffer according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 001SGS172). Then, the CPU 103 identifies the set value (step 001SGS173), selects a display result determination table according to the set value (step 001SGS174), and determines whether the read random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the selected display result determination table (step 001SGS175). In addition, in the process of step 00SGS175, if the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, it is determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the normal state or the time-saving state, and if the game state is the probability variable state, it is determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the probability variable state.

If the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of the large value judgment value, the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 001SGS176). At this time, the jackpot type judgment table shown in FIG. 9(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of several types (step 001SGS177). By referring to the jackpot type judgment table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment read out matches with the judgment value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type judgment table (step 001SGS178).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 001SGS178, it is determined before the derivation of the confirmed special symbol as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability-changing state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. The determined jackpot type is stored in correspondence with the jackpot type thus determined, for example by setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 001SGS179). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0", if it is a "variable A" corresponding to a variable jackpot A, the buffer value should be set to "0", if it is a "variable B" corresponding to a variable jackpot B, the buffer value should be set to "2", and if it is a "variable C" corresponding to a variable jackpot C, the buffer value should be set to "3".

Also, after execution of step 001SGS179 or in step 001SGS175, if the value of the random number MR1 is not within the range of the jackpot determination value, that is, if it is determined to be a "miss" (step 001SGS175; N), the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determination result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot game state, and ends the special pattern determination process (step 001SGS180). In the process of step 001SGS180, for example, in response to the pre-determination result that the special pattern display result is a "miss", it is determined to light up the two upper and lower LEDs arranged at the left end of the LEDs constituting the special pattern display device, and in response to the pre-determination result that the special pattern display result is a "jackpot", it is determined to light up the eight LEDs constituting the special pattern display device in different combinations according to the jackpot type (excluding the above-mentioned miss combination).

(Variation pattern setting process)
Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS159 in Fig. 31 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in Fig. 34, the CPU 103 first judges whether the variable display result is a big win or not (step 001SGS201). If the variable display result is not a big win, that is, a miss (step 001SGS201; N), the miss performance judgment table shown in Fig. 10 is selected (step 001SGS202a), and the miss performance (presence or absence of reach performance) is determined based on the random number value MR3 read in step 001SGS172 in Fig. 32 and the selected miss performance judgment table (step 001SGS202b). Then, it is judged whether or not reach performance is executed (step 001SGS202c).

If a reach effect is not executed as the miss effect, that is, if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is selected (step 001SGS202c; N), proceed to step 001SGS202f. If a reach effect is executed as the miss effect, that is, if a normal reach or super reach fluctuation pattern is selected (step 001SGS202c; Y), select a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIG. 11) according to the game state (step 001SGS202d). For example, if the game state is the normal state, select fluctuation pattern type determination table A, if the game state is the time-saving state, select fluctuation pattern type determination table B, and if the game state is the probability variable state, select fluctuation pattern type determination table C.

Then, the type of fluctuation pattern (the reach effect to be executed) is determined based on the random number value MR4 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 32 and the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS202f (step 001SGS202e).

In step 001SGS202f, the CPU 103 selects a loss fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 13 to 15) according to the game status, number of reserved memories, etc., in addition to the loss performance and fluctuation pattern type described above, and proceeds to step 001SGS203 (step 001SGS202f).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201; Y), the variable display result determination table for a jackpot (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the game status is selected and the process proceeds to step 001SGS203.

Then, in the processing of step 001SGS203, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR5 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 32 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

After the variation pattern is determined in step 001SGS203, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 001SGS204). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 001SGS204, various commands are sent when the special symbol starts to change (step 001SGS205). For example, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends a game state designation command, a first variable display start designation, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially sends a game state designation command, a second variable display start designation, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a second special symbol reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 001SGS205, the special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variable pattern, is set, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 001SGS206). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary.

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Fig. 28 as the special symbol variation process. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 decrements the variable display time timer value by 1 (step 001SGS207) and judges whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 001SGS208a; N), the special symbol variation process is terminated. If the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process, and the special symbol variation process is terminated (step 001SGS08b).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S112 of FIG. 28 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol by turning on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 (step 001SGS211). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, a symbol determination command is sent to the performance control board 12 (step 001SGS212). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 001SGS213).

When the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 001SGS213; Y), if the special probability flag or time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 001SGS214), and transmits to the performance control board 12 one of the following commands depending on the type of jackpot stored: jackpot start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), jackpot start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), jackpot start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or jackpot start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) (step 001SGS215).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 001SGS216).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 001SGS217). The number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 001SGS218). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process for the jackpot opening (step S113), and the special symbol stopping process is terminated (step 001SGS219).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 001SGS213; N), in step 001SGS220, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on (step 001SGS220). If the time-saving flag is off (step 001SGS220; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS25. If the time-saving flag is on (step 001SGS220; Y), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS221). If the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS221; Y), the process proceeds to step 001SGS225.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 001SGS221; N), that is, if the time-saving count is still remaining and the base state is high, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS222). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" (step 001SGS223), and if it is not "0" (step 001SGS223; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS225. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 001SGS223; Y), the time-saving flag is cleared to the OFF state in order to end the time-saving control, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS225 (step 001SGS224).

In step 001SGS225, a game state designation command is sent according to the state of the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 001SGS226).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S116 of FIG. 28 as the jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 001SGS231). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 001SGS231; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 001SGS232), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 001SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS233). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; N), the variable jackpot flag and the time-saving flag are turned on (step 001SGS237, step 001SGS238). In addition, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 001SGS239), and the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; Y), steps 001SGS240 and 001SGS241 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

In step 001SGS242, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 001SGS243). Then, after sending a game state designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability variable flag and time-saving flag (step 001SGS244), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 001SGS245).

(Display Processing)
Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S37 of Fig. 24 as the display process. In the display process, the CPU 103 first specifies the start port buffer value and the special chart process flag value (step 001SGS251, step 001SGS252). In addition, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the second special chart reserved memory count value, that is, the first special chart reserved chrysanthemum number and the second special chart reserved memory number, are specified (step 001SGS253). Then, the lighting data of the LEDs in the first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B are set according to the specified contents.

For example, as shown in FIG. 39(A), when the start port buffer value is 1, the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, the special pattern process flag value is 0, and the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 1, even if the LED of the first reserved display 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the number of reserved memories being 1, the LED will be turned off when the variable display based on the reserved memory is started at the next interruption (all LEDs constituting the first reserved display 25A will be turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the first reserved display 25A is not lit, and when the special pattern process flag value is 0-6 and the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 2-4, even if the variable display based on the first first special pattern reserved memory is started at the next interruption, one of the LEDs constituting the first reserved display 25A will be lit, so data is set so that the LED of the first reserved display 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39(B), when the start port buffer value is 1 and the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 or more, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, so data is set to light up the LED of the first reserved indicator 25A in a manner according to the total number of reserved symbols, regardless of the special symbol process flag value and the number of reserved first special symbols.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39(C), when the start port buffer value is 2, if the special pattern process flag value is 0 and the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, even if the LED of the second reserved display 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the number of reserved memories being 1, the LED will be turned off when the variable display based on the reserved memory is started at the next interruption (all LEDs constituting the second reserved display 25B will be turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the second reserved display 25B is not lit, and if the special pattern process flag value is 0 to 6 and the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 to 4, even if the variable display based on the first second special pattern reserved memory is started at the next interruption, one of the LEDs constituting the second reserved display 25B will be lit, so data is set so that the LED of the second reserved display 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the lighting data of the LED on the regular map reserve display 25C according to the number of regular map reserves stored (step 001SGS255).

To set the data for turning on the LEDs of the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general hold indicator 25C, the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0" in the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 21.

The CPU 103 further identifies the game state, and if the identified game state is a jackpot game state, further identifies the jackpot type (step 001SGS256). Then, depending on the identified game state and jackpot type, it sets the lighting data of each LED in the round number indicator 26, the win indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29, and ends the display process (step 001SGS257).

To set the data for turning on the LEDs of the round number indicator 26, the win indicator 27, the right hit indicator 28, and the status indicator 29, the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0" in the output port DG5 shown in FIG. 21.

(Special symbol display control process)
40 is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step S40 of FIG. 24 as a special symbol display control process. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 1, that is, whether any special symbol is being variably displayed (step 001SGS261). If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 1 (step 001SGS261; N), the special symbol display control process is terminated, and if the value of the special symbol process flag is 1 (step 001SGS261; Y), the variable special symbol designation buffer value, that is, which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being variably displayed, is specified (step 001SGS262), and the value of the variable display time timer is specified (step 001SGS263). Then, the LED lighting data in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is set according to the specified variable special pattern designation buffer value and the variable display time timer value, and the special pattern display control process is terminated (step 001SGS264).

To set the data for lighting the LEDs of the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be lit can be set to "1" and the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be turned off can be set to "0" in the output port DG1 and output port DG2 shown in FIG. 21.

Although not shown in the figure, in the normal pattern display control process (step S41), the lighting data of the LED in the normal pattern display device 20 is set based on whether or not the variable display of the normal pattern is being performed and the value of the variable display time timer for the normal pattern (in the output port DG4 shown in FIG. 21, the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0").

(Display control process)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S43 of FIG. 24 as the display control process. The display control process is a process for lighting each LED constituting the special pattern unit 201 based on the data ("1" or "0" set in the bit of each output port DG shown in FIG. 21) created in the display process and the special pattern display control process described above. In the display control process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the DG counter value is 4, which is the maximum value (step 001SGS271). The DG counter is a counter for selecting which of the output ports shown in FIG. 21, the output port DG1, the output port DG2, the output port DG3, and the output port DG4, to light up, that is, a counter for determining which of the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A, the LEDs constituting the second special pattern display device 4B, the LEDs constituting the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, and the ordinary reserved indicator 25C, and the LEDs constituting the ordinary pattern display device 20 are to be lighted up.

If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS271; Y), the DG counter value is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS272); if the DG counter value is other than 4 (step 001SGS271; N), the DG counter value is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS273).

In step 001SGS274, the CPU 103 determines whether the DG counter value is 1. If the DG counter value is 1 (step 001SGS274; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG5 is stopped (step 001SGS275), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG1 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS276). In other words, if the DG counter value is 1, the drive signal is output from output port DG1 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG1.

If the DG counter value is not 1 (step 001SGS274; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277). If the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG1 is stopped (step 001SGS278), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG2 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS279). In other words, if the DG counter value is 2, the drive signal is output from output port DG2 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG2.

If the DG counter value is not 2 (step 001SGS277; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280). If the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG2 is stopped (step 001SGS281), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG3 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS282). In other words, if the DG counter value is 3, the drive signal is output from output port DG3 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general hold indicator 25C) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG3.

If the DG counter value is not 3 (step 001SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283). If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG3 is stopped (step 001SGS284), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG4 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS285). In other words, if the DG counter value is 4, the drive signal is output from output port DG4 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG4.

If the DG counter value is not 4 (step 001SGS283; N), the DG counter value is deemed to be 5, and the output of the drive signal from output port DG4 is stopped (step 001SGS286), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG5 is started, terminating the display control process (step 001SGS287). In other words, if the DG counter value is 5, the drive signal is output from output port DG5, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the round number indicator 26, win indicator light 27, right hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG5.

In other words, in this embodiment, the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A, the LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B and the regular hold indicator 25C, the LEDs constituting the regular symbol display device 20, the round count indicator 26, the win indicator 27, the right hit indicator 28 and the status indicator 29 are configured to periodically repeat a 16 ms off state and a 4 ms on state by changing the LEDs that are the targets of illumination every 4 ms, which is the interrupt period of the CPU 103.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 24, when a start winning occurs, as shown in Figure 42 (A), the start winning occurrence is determined in the start port switch passing process and a command corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (start port winning designation command) is sent, and then the display process and display control process are executed, thereby starting the light emission control of the hold indicator (first hold indicator 25A or second hold indicator 25B) corresponding to the start winning.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 42(B), the special pattern determination process and buffer shift process are executed within the normal special pattern process, and the reserved memory number notification command is sent, and then the display process and display control process are executed, so that the light emission control in the reserved display device after the reserved memory number is subtracted is started in response to the start of the variable display.

When the variable display of the special pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 42(C), the special pattern display control process and the display control process are executed, and light emission control of the special pattern display device corresponding to the variable display is started, and then the special pattern variation process starts decrementing the variable display time (variable display time timer).

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120, which can identify the number of pending memories including the new pending memory, based on the occurrence of a new pending memory while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may send a command indicating the occurrence of the new pending memory (for example, a pending memory number increase notification command) to the performance control CPU 120. In addition, based on receiving the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command or the pending memory number increase notification command, the performance control CPU 120 may light up the first sub-pending indicator 151A or the second sub-pending indicator 151B in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the special pattern, which can specify the reserved memory number after the start of the variable display of the special pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may transmit a command to the performance control CPU 120 simply indicating that the reserved memory number has decreased (for example, a reserved memory number decrease notification command) based on the start of the variable display of the special pattern. Furthermore, based on receiving the reserved memory number notification command or the reserved memory number decrease notification command, the performance control CPU 120 may light up the first sub-reserved indicator 151A or the second sub-reserved indicator 151B in a manner corresponding to the reserved memory number after the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 43. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 43 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S151), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S153). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S153; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically turn off the interrupt prohibition state is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to enabled and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S153 (step S153; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S154), and a command analysis process is executed (step S155). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S155, the performance control process is executed (step S156). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S156, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S157), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S157), a demo performance control processing (step S158) for executing a demo performance on the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operation reception control processing (step S158a) for receiving operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and a background display update processing (step S159) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S153. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to display a guide display on the image display device 5 on condition that 30 seconds (3000 ms) have passed without any new pending memory being generated, based on receiving a command to execute a demo display performance from the CPU 103 (for example, a demo display performance designation command), and further executes control to display an image of the demo display performance on the image display device 5 on condition that 30 seconds (3000 ms) have passed without any new pending memory being generated. Furthermore, if a new pending memory is generated while an image of the guide display or demo display performance is being displayed, control to stop the display of the image of the guide display or demo display performance may be executed.

In addition, in the operation reception process, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 based on receiving the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A when the number of first special symbol reserved memories or the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 and no variable display of any special symbol is being performed, and further executes control to change the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 by receiving the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A while the menu screen is being displayed.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, it is possible to execute control to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on a change in the game state or a decision to change the presentation mode at the start of variable display.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S156 of Fig. 43 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Fig. 43, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a performance mode determination process (step S160) for determining a performance mode when a variable display is executed, a hold change performance determination process (step S161) for determining the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold memory display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F, a win flash performance process (step S162) for executing an entry flash performance that continuously suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a start winning by emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, a button vibration performance process (step S163) for executing a button vibration performance that drives the push button 31B by the vibration motor 36, a button vibration performance process (step S164) for executing a button vibration performance that causes the hold display to appear in the hold memory display area 5U, and a button vibration performance process (step S165) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S166) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S167) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S168) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S169) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S170) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S171) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S172) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S173) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S174) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S175) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S176) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S177) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S178) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S179) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S180) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S181) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S182) for executing a button vibration performance process (step S The display control unit 120 executes an appearance animation process (step S164) for displaying the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F in a dwelling manner, a shift animation process (step S165) for displaying the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U in a dwelling manner toward the previous display position on the reserved memory display area 5U or the active display area 5F, a termination animation process (step S167) for displaying the active display in the active display area 5F, and a sub-reserved display lighting control process (step S168) for controlling the lighting of the LEDs constituting the first sub-reserved display 151A and the second sub-reserved display 151B based on the reserved memory number. The sub-reserved display lighting control process is also a process for updating the display of the first special reserved memory number and the second special reserved memory in the display area 5S described later. After the termination animation process is executed, for example, one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as follows is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command (variable pattern designation) specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, a process is performed to determine the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various notice performances are executed, and the state and execution start timing, based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command (change pattern designation, variable display result designation). In this embodiment, a change pattern on the performance control side is determined as a sub-change pattern. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) reflecting the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, in the variable display performance process in this embodiment, the lighting control of the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B is also executed. After performing such performance control, the final decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, is stopped in response to, for example, reading out an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the stop display of the final decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is stopped, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", and the performance processing during variable display is terminated. Note that the processing of step 172 in this embodiment also performs processing to execute the variable display of small patterns in the display area 5S, which will be described later.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Performance mode)
As shown in Figure 45, in this embodiment, presentation modes A to D are provided, where presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be selected when the game state is in a normal state, presentation mode C is a presentation mode that is selected when the game state is in a time-saving state, and presentation mode D is a presentation mode that is selected when the game state is in a special state.

In the presentation mode determination process, when the game state is normal, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A at the start timing of the first variable display in the normal state. Also, at the start timing of the second or subsequent variable display in the normal state, if the set presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode B by lottery, and if the set presentation mode is presentation mode B, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A by lottery.

In addition, in the presentation mode determination process, when the jackpot game state ends, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode C based on the reception of a game state designation command indicating a time-saving state from the CPU 103, and the presentation mode is set to presentation mode D based on the reception of a game state designation command indicating a probability bonus state from the CPU 103.

The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the presentation modes A to D have different background images displayed on the image display device 5, variable display modes of decorative patterns, and display modes of active and pending displays.

(Hold change performance determination process)
Figure 46 is the determination ratio of the display mode of the reserved display and active display in the reserved change performance determination process shown in Figure 44. In the reserved change performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Figure 22 (B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set. If there is an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in the entry, and the miss performance is identified from the miss performance pattern command in the entry, and the presence or absence of the reserved change performance and the performance pattern, that is, the display mode of the reserved display and active display are determined based on the identified variable display result and miss performance.

For example, as shown in FIG. 46, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 25% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern A, and a 70% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern B. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern A, and a 0% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern B. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a normal reach, there is a 75% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 20% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern A, and a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern B. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, there is a 25% chance that presentation pattern A of the hold change presentation will be performed, and there is a 10% chance that presentation pattern B of the hold change presentation will be performed.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern A, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern B.

In the present embodiment, the hold change performance determination process illustrates an example in which the hold change performance is executed or not and the hold change performance pattern determination ratio is changed depending on whether the symbol designation command, that is, the variable display result, is a jackpot or not. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the hold change performance may be executed or not and the hold change performance pattern determination ratio may be changed depending on whether the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A, a probability variable jackpot B, a probability variable jackpot C, or a non-probability variable jackpot. Also, the hold change performance may be executed or not and the hold change performance pattern determination ratio may be changed depending on whether the jackpot is controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot play ends. By doing this, it is easier to draw the player's attention to whether the hold change performance is executed and which performance pattern the hold change performance is executed with.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A to a value between 0 and 2, the performance control CPU 120 executes the appearance animation process (step S164), dwell animation process (step 165), and shift animation process (step S166) described below. When the pending display flag is set to a value of "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a shape corresponding to the performance mode and in white, when the pending display flag is set to a value of "1", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a shape corresponding to the performance mode and in blue, and when the pending display flag is set to a value of "2", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a shape corresponding to the performance mode and in red.

With these settings, when the pending display or active display is displayed in blue in display pattern A or red in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed in white, and when the pending display or active display is displayed in red in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed in blue in display pattern A, so that the player can be drawn to the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a pending change presentation is executed and the presentation pattern.

(Flash effect processing when winning)
Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing the winning flash effect process shown in Fig. 44. In the winning flash effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Fig. 22 (B) and judges whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301). If there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N), it further judges whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is already set to "1", that is, whether the winning flash effect has already been executed for another reserved memory (step 001SGS302).

If there is no pending memory with the winning flash effect flag set to "1", it is determined whether or not to execute the winning flash effect from the designation command and the losing effect pattern command stored as pending memory with the winning flash effect flag not set (step 001SGS303).

For example, as shown in FIG. 48, when the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 60% of the time. Also, when the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a non-reach, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 100% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 0% of the time. Also, when the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a normal reach, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 100% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 0% of the time. Also, when the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a super reach, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 80% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 20% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304; Y), it sets the flash effect flag for the reserved memory to "1" and proceeds to step 007SGS307 (step 001SGS305). If it has decided not to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304; N), it sets the flash effect flag for the reserved memory to "0" and proceeds to step 001SGS307 (step 001SGS306).

If there is no reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N) or after the processing of steps 001SGS305 and 001SGS306 is executed, the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 22 (B) is referenced to determine whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" (step 001SGS307). If there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" (step 001SGS307; Y), it is determined whether the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is being performed, that is, whether the reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is stored in the entry of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A (step 001SGS308). If the winning flash effect flag is not being set to "1" and a variable display is being performed in response to the reserved memory (step 001SGS308; N), proceed to step 001SGS310. If the winning flash effect flag is being set to "1" and a variable display is being performed in response to the reserved memory (step 001SGS308; Y), the process table of the variable display being performed is further referenced to determine whether the variable display is occurring before the reach (step 001SGS309). If the variable display is occurring before the reach (step 001SGS309; Y), proceed to step 001SGS310.

Then, in the process of step 001SGS310, blinking control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the winning flash effect process is terminated (step 00SGS310). Note that if there is no reserved memory of the winning flash effect flag being "1" (step 001SGS307; N) or if the variable display is at a timing after the reach (step 001SGS309; N), the winning flash effect process is terminated without executing the process of step 001SGS310.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated as a flash effect when a start winning occurs, suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple light emission patterns and light emission colors of the game effect lamp 9 as a flash effect when a winning occurs may be provided, and the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of winning) may be varied depending on the light emission pattern and light emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated as a flash effect when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. A lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a lamp dedicated to the flash effect when a prize is won) may be provided, and the lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated as a flash effect when a prize is won.

(Button vibration processing)
Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing the button vibration effect process shown in Fig. 44. In the button vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether or not the button vibration effect execution flag indicating that the button vibration effect is being executed is set (step 001SGS321). If the button vibration effect execution flag is not set (step 001SGS321; N), it judges whether or not the game state is normal (step 001SGS322). If the game state is normal (step 001SGS322; Y), it further judges whether or not the first start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323). If the first start port winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration performance processing is terminated, and if the first start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323; Y), the number of first special charts reserved is identified by referring to the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Figure 22 (B) (step 001SGS324).

On the other hand, if the game state is not the normal state (step 001SGS322; N), the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state (step 001SGS325). If the game state is not the time-saving state or the probability variable state, that is, if the game state is the jackpot game state (step 001SGS325; N), the button vibration presentation process is terminated, and if the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state (step 001SGS325; Y), it further judges whether the second start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326). If the second start gate winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS326; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated. If the second start gate winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326; Y), the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 22 (B) is referenced to identify the number of second special charts reserved (step 001SGS327).

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects judges whether the number of reserved memories identified in step 001SGS324 or step 001SGS327 is three or more (step 001SGS328). That is, in step 001SGS328, if the game state is normal, it judges whether the number of reserved memories of the first special chart is three or more, and if the game state is time-saving or probability-changing, it judges whether the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three or more. If the number of reserved memories identified is two or less (step 001SGS328; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the number of reserved memories identified is three or more (step 001SGS328; Y), the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS39), and the button vibration effect execution timer is set, and the button vibration effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS330).

If the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration motor control process (step 001SGS331) to drive the vibration motor 36, i.e., to vibrate the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 36, and decrements the value of the button vibration effect execution timer by 1 (step 001SGS332), and determines whether the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS333). If the button vibration effect execution timer has not timed out (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS323; Y), the button vibration effect execution flag is cleared and the button vibration effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS334). In other words, the button vibration effect in this embodiment is an effect that notifies you that the number of reserved memories is approaching the upper limit of four by vibrating the push button 31B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five seconds) when the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reaches three in the normal state, or when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reaches three in the time-saving or special probability state.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state, a button vibration effect is executed based on the number of reserved second special symbols being three or more, and a notification is given that the number of reserved second special symbols is approaching the upper limit of four. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the time-saving state and the probability variable state are game states in which the game ball frequently enters the starting winning hole, the button vibration effect may not be executed in these time-saving states and the probability variable state.

(Sub-hold indicator lighting control processing)
Fig. 50 is a diagram showing the lighting control state of the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B for each situation in which the performance control CPU 120 receives a start winning designation command in the sub-hold indicator lighting control process (step S168) shown in Fig. 44. In the sub-hold indicator lighting control process, whether or not to light the LEDs constituting the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B is determined depending on the received start winning designation command and the number of reserved memories.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 when the first start port winning designation command is received, if the performance process flag value is 0, that is, when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display of decorative patterns is not being executed, and there are no reserved memories other than the first special chart reserved memory based on a winning entry into the new first start port, the performance control CPU 120 will immediately execute variable display of decorative patterns based on the first special chart reserved memory, and will not execute control to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reserve display 151A according to the number of first special chart reserved memories (control to light up only one LED in the first sub-reserve display 151A). On the other hand, if the performance process flag value is 0 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 2 to 4, i.e., when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed but there are first special symbol reserved memories other than the reserved memories based on the new start winning, or if the performance process flag value is 1 to 7 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, i.e., during variable display of decorative symbols including execution of variable display start setting process or during jackpot game regardless of the number of reserved memories, control is executed to light up a number of LEDs according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories in the first sub reserved display 151A.

Also, as shown in FIG. 50(B), when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more when the first start hole winning designation command is received, that is, when a game ball newly enters the first start hole and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reservation display 151A according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories, regardless of the performance process flag value or the number of first special symbol reserved memories, since the next variable display of the decorative symbol executed is based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20(C), when a second start port entry designation command is received, that is, when a game ball newly enters the second start entry port regardless of the number of first special chart reserved memories, if the presentation process flag value is 0 and the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1, that is, when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed, and there are no second special chart reserved memories other than the reserved memories based on the new start entry, the presentation control CPU 120 immediately executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second special chart reserved memory, and therefore does not execute control to light up a number of LEDs in the second sub-reserved display 151B according to the number of second special chart reserved memories (control to light up only one LED of the second reserve display 25B). On the other hand, if the performance process flag value is 0 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 2 to 4, i.e., when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed but there are second special symbol reserved memories other than the reserved memories based on the new start winning, or if the performance process flag value is 1 to 7 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, i.e., regardless of the number of reserved memories, during variable display of decorative symbols including during execution of variable display start setting process or during jackpot game, control is executed to light up a number of LEDs according to the number of second special symbol reserved memories in the second sub reserved display 151B.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 44. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341). If the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 001SGS342). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start designation reception flag is off in step 001SGS341 (step 001SGS341; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343). If the second variable display start designation reception flag is off (step 001SGS343; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 001SGS344). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 001SGS342 or step 001SGS344, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 001SGS345).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 001SGS346). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In addition, in this feature section 001SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as even symbols as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, then depending on the variation pattern, a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols or a combination that results in a reach miss (missing symbol) such as "767" is determined.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 001SGS346, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variable pattern designation command (step 001SGS347) and starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 001SGS348).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 001SGS349). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 001SGS350). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 001SGS351). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 001SGS352).

(Period related to processing of CPU 103 and performance control CPU 120)
Here, the period of processing executed by the CPU 103 and the performance control CPU 120 (and the display control unit 123) in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 24 every 4 ms. That is, the CPU 103 in this embodiment executes the determination of whether or not a start winning has occurred, the special pattern process processing, the normal pattern process processing, the command control processing, and the like every 4 ms. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the 500 ms after the variable display of the special pattern as a pattern determination period during which the variable display of the special pattern is not executed. Furthermore, the CPU 103 executes the on/off control of the LEDs constituting the special pattern at 40 ms intervals, with one period being 320 ms (see FIG. 18 (A)), apart from the periodic 12 ms off state and 4 ms on state in the display control processing (step S43).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control main process shown in FIG. 26 every 2 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 103 (command analysis process), and executes performance control process process, performance random number update process, demo performance control process, background display update process, etc., every 2 ms. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B on and off at 240 ms intervals, with one cycle being 480 ms (see FIG. 18(B)).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display control unit 123 requires a period of 33 ms to draw an image (image drawing period), and the period for updating the image displayed on the image display device 5 to a new image (image update period) is 33 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is updated approximately 30 times per second (30 FPS).

(Details of the performance mode)
Next, the presentation modes A to D will be described. As described above, the presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be set when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), the presentation mode C is a presentation mode that is set when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and the presentation mode D is a presentation mode that is set when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state). In each presentation mode in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved display and active display displayed on the image display device 5, the execution period of various animations, and whether or not they are executed are different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the pending display appearance animation is executed over 660 ms (20 frames) in presentation mode A and presentation mode B, over 165 ms (5 frames) in presentation mode C, and over 99 ms (3 frames) in presentation mode D. Note that these pending display appearance animations may be shortened as described below.

In addition, the pause animation for the pending and active displays is repeated in one cycle of 2970 ms (90 frames) in presentation modes A and B, but is not executed in presentation modes C and D.

The ending animation for active display is executed in 165 ms (5 frames) for all presentation modes A through D.

(Display mode of each performance mode)
As shown in Fig. 53 (A1), in the performance mode A, the decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background image 001SG081 showing a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Fig. 53 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame-in manner from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is displayed in a frame-out manner from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) displayed in a frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame-in manner and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the succeeding "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the succeeding "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of numbers "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

The display area 5S provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols, while the reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These reserved displays and active displays are displayed as cubes containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first reserved display, "F" for the second reserved display, "L" for the third reserved display, and "II (Roman numeral 2)" for the fourth reserved display) (see FIG. 67(A)).

In this embodiment, each time a new reserved memory is generated, the letters displayed in the new reserved display change regularly from P → W → F → L → II → P → W.... For example, if there are zero reserved memories and four new reserved memories are generated consecutively during the variable display of special symbols, if the letter in the active display is "P", then in the reserved memory display area 5U, the letter in the first reserved display will be "W", the letter in the second reserved display will be "F", the letter in the third reserved display will be "L", and the letter in the fourth reserved display will be "II". Also, in this situation, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the variable display of the new special pattern ends, the reserved display containing the letter "W" shifts to the active display in the active display area 5F, and in the reserved memory display area 5U, the reserved display containing the letter "F" shifts to the display position of the first reserved display, the reserved display containing the letter "L" shifts to the display position of the second reserved display, and the reserved display containing the letter "II" shifts to the display position of the third reserved display. Furthermore, if a new reserved memory (fourth reserved memory) occurs in this state, a reserved display containing the letter "P" is displayed in the display position of the fourth reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U.

In the present embodiment, the letters "P", "W", "F", "L", and "II" are displayed in the active display and the reserved display in the order in which the reserved memories were generated, as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if there is one or more reserved memories when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from a power outage, the letters in the active display and the reserved display may be displayed in a predetermined order (for example, "P", "W", "F", "L", and "II") regardless of the order of letters in the active display and the reserved display immediately before the power outage (for example, "F", "L", "II", "P", "W" or "II", "P", "W", "F", and "L"). In addition, the first special reserved memory number, the second special reserved memory number, the small pattern, the reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common to all performance modes, so their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 53 (B1), in presentation mode B, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 001SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves in a curved shape from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed as frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and then frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed as it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and then frame-out.

In addition, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "2" decorative pattern) displayed in the frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, when the leading "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the following "3" decorative pattern and the "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number from "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and the display is updated and displayed repeatedly from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as regular octahedrons containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) (see FIG. 67(A)).

As shown in FIG. 53 (C1), in presentation mode C, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 001SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotational display that rotates around an axis of rotation that faces in the vertical direction.

In more detail, the decorative symbols in presentation mode C have a first surface and a second surface that is the opposite surface of the first surface, and a preceding decorative symbol (e.g., a decorative symbol of a "3") is displayed on the first surface. On the other hand, when the first surface faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether a succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., a decorative symbol of a "4") is displayed on the second surface.

The decorative patterns can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from the first side, to the second side, to the first side, to the second side, etc., the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, when the first surface 5b is rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the second surface is displayed, the second surface displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "3") displayed on the first surface. Next, although not shown in the figure, when the second surface 5b is rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the first surface is displayed, the first surface displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 001SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a time-saving remaining display 001SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as spheres containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) (see FIG. 67(A)).

As shown in FIG. 53 (D1), in performance mode D, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (D2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame-in manner from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is displayed in a frame-out manner from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) displayed in a frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame-in manner and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of numbers "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., before returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as spheres containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) just like in presentation mode C, but differ in that the color scheme inside these spheres is inverted from the color scheme of the letters contained therein (see FIG. 67(A)).

(Appearance animation)
Next, the animation of the reserved display in each performance mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "animation" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame before, and the visibility may be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the image one frame before. In other words, the "animation" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" in which the display mode such as color tone changes.

In this embodiment, the "appearing animation" is an animation for displaying a reserved display corresponding to the occurrence of a reserved memory at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U when a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the start winning hole. As shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 67 (B), when a start winning occurs in the performance mode A and the execution of a reserved change performance is not determined based on the start winning, that is, when the reserved display is displayed in white, the new reserved display moves from a position on the lower front side of the reserved memory display area 5U to a position on the upper side of the reserved memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning. Then, when the reserved display reaches the upper position of the reserved memory display area 5U, it descends toward a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U, and is finally displayed at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U. In other words, when a start winning occurs in the performance mode A and the execution of a reserved change performance is not determined based on the start winning, the reserved display moves in a parabolic manner from a position on the lower front side of the reserved memory display area 5U.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 56, the pending display moves in a parabolic arc with its apex at a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, so the appearance animation of the white pending display in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed over a wider area than the dwell animation of the active display and pending display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56, in the appearance animation when a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and it is not decided to execute a hold change presentation based on the start winning, the hold display is displayed with a high transparency in the first frame image (for example, the transparency of the hold display in the first frame image is 90%), and as the appearance animation progresses, the transparency of the hold display gradually decreases to 80%, 60%, 40%, etc. Then, in the 20th frame image of the appearance animation, the hold display reaches its final state with a transparency of 0%, and is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

As shown in Figures 55 and 67 (B), when a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and it is decided to execute a hold change presentation based on the start winning, i.e., when the hold display is displayed in blue or red, an effect is displayed at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U based on the start winning, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, while a blue or red hold display gradually descends toward the hold memory display area 5U while decreasing its transparency in place of the effect. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Then, at the timing when the effect completely disappears, the hold display is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a hold change presentation in presentation mode A, the appearance animation of the hold display starts by displaying the hold display at a size larger than the active display and hold display already displayed, and gradually reduces the size of the hold display as it moves (descends).

Although not specifically shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in presentation mode A start to be displayed from a higher position than the active displays and pending displays already displayed and move (down) toward the pending memory display area 5U, so the appearance animation of the blue and red pending displays in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the dwell animation of the active displays and pending displays.

As shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 67 (B), when a start winning occurs in the performance mode B and it is decided not to execute the hold change performance based on the start winning, that is, when the hold display is displayed in white, an effect is displayed at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (the transparency increases) as it descends, while the white hold display gradually descends toward the hold memory display area 5U while decreasing the transparency in place of the effect. In other words, the effect and the hold display both descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Note that the effect in this appearance animation disappears 5 frames from the start of the animation, but the hold display continues to descend even after the effect disappears. Then, when a predetermined period (15 frames in the case of the animation) has passed since the effect disappeared, the hold display is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

Although not specifically shown, the white pending display and effects in presentation mode B start to be displayed from a higher position than the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move (down) toward the pending memory display area 5U. Because of this movement, the appearance animation of the white pending display in presentation mode B is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the dwell animation of the active display and pending display.

As shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 67(B), when a start winning occurs in the performance mode B and it is decided to execute a hold change performance based on the start winning, i.e., when the hold display is displayed in blue or red, an effect is displayed at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning, just as when it is decided to execute a hold change performance in the performance mode A, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (the transparency increases) as it descends, while the effect is replaced by a blue or red hold display that gradually decreases in transparency and descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Then, when the effect completely disappears, the hold display is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a hold change presentation in presentation mode B, the appearance animation of the hold display starts by displaying the hold display at a size larger than the active display and hold display already displayed, and gradually reduces the size of the hold display as it moves (descends).

Although not specifically shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in presentation mode A start to be displayed from a higher position than the active displays and pending displays already displayed and move (down) toward the pending memory display area 5U, so the appearance animation of the blue and red pending displays in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the dwell animation of the active displays and pending displays.

As shown in Figures 55 and 59, when a blue or red reserved display is displayed in presentation mode A or presentation mode B (when a reserved change presentation is executed), an effect is displayed at the upper position of the reserved memory display area 5U as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, so that the player can recognize that the reserved display that will be displayed from now on is the reserved display that is the target of the reserved change presentation, that is, the probability that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when a white reserved display is displayed. Furthermore, until the ninth frame of the appearance animation, the transparency of the reserved display is set high so that the player cannot recognize whether the display color of the reserved display is blue or red, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display color of the reserved display is blue or red, that is, how high the probability that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state is.

Also, as shown in Figures 55 and 59, when a blue or red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A or presentation mode B (when a hold change presentation is executed), a common effect is displayed as the image of frames 1 to 19 as the appearance animation. In other words, a common effect is displayed in a total of four appearance animations: when a blue hold display is displayed in presentation mode A, when a red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A, when a blue hold display is displayed in presentation mode B, and when a red hold display is displayed in presentation mode B. Therefore, when the hold display is displayed in blue or red in presentation mode A or presentation mode B, the image data used as these appearance animations can be standardized, and the amount of data required to execute the appearance animations can be reduced.

As shown in Figures 60, 61 and 67, when a new start winning occurs in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, first, an effect is displayed in a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories based on the start winning. The effect becomes invisible (the transparency increases) as the appearance animation progresses. Then, in place of the effect, the pending display is enlarged and displayed with a decreasing transparency at a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories. Then, when the effect has completely disappeared, the decrease in transparency and enlargement of the pending display also ends.

As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the appearance animation in presentation mode C takes a longer time from when the effect starts to be displayed until it disappears than the appearance animation in presentation mode D, and the time required from when the pending display starts to when it finishes expanding is also set to be longer.

(Stay animation)
Next, the animation of the reserved display and the active display in each presentation mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "retention animation" includes an animation that operates the active display in the active display area 5F in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode (rotation in presentation mode A, rotation in presentation mode B, non-operation in presentation modes C and D) during the variable display of the special pattern, and an animation that operates the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode (rotation in presentation mode A, rotation in presentation mode B, non-operation in presentation modes C and D) when there is one or more reserved memories.

As shown in Figures 62 (A) and 67 (B), the dwell animation in presentation mode A is an animation that rotates the pending display or active display clockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. The dwell animation in presentation mode A is executed repeatedly with one cycle being 90 frames. Furthermore, in the dwell animation in presentation mode A, the text in the pending display or active display also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pending display or active display.

Also, as shown in Figures 62 (B) and 67 (B), the dwell animation in presentation mode B is an animation that rotates the pending display or active display alternately in a clockwise and counterclockwise direction around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. The dwell animation in this presentation mode has one cycle of 90 frames, and in the first 45 frames, the pending display or active display rotates counterclockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front, and in the last 45 frames, the pending display or active display rotates clockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. In the dwell animation in presentation mode B, the text in the pending display or active display also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, i.e., the time-saving state and the probability change state, the time required for each variable display is set to be shorter than in the normal state in which the pending display and active display are displayed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B, so the pause animation of the pending display and active display is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pause animation of the pending display and active display may also be executed in presentation mode C and presentation mode D.

The dwell animation in this embodiment is an animation that is displayed at one cycle of 90 frames (2970 ms), that is, at about 30 frames per second (frame rate of about 30 FPS). Here, since the dwell animation is an animation that is viewed by the player for a longer period of time than the appearance animation or the end animation, the idea is to make the operation of the pending display appear leisurely. In addition, by producing the appearance animation at a frame rate of about 30 FPS, it is not only easier to develop the gaming machine, but also has the advantage that the developer can easily imagine the actual operation of the pending display. For the above reasons, the dwell animation in this embodiment is produced as an animation with a frame rate of 30 FPS, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the dwell animation may be an animation with a frame rate lower or higher than 30 FPS.

(End animation)
Next, the ending animation of the active display in each performance mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "ending animation" is an animation that ends the display of the active display corresponding to the variable display (makes the active display disappear from the active display area 5F) when the variable display of the special pattern ends (stops). As shown in Figures 63(A) to 63(D) and 67(B), the ending animation in each performance mode is an animation that is executed in the active display area 5F, and the transparency of the active display corresponding to the ended variable display gradually increases, and it completely disappears from the active display area 5F in the fifth frame.

In this embodiment, the ending animation is exemplified as being executed in a common manner in each presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the execution period of the ending animation may be common in each presentation mode, while a different weekly rainfall animation may be executed in each presentation mode.

(shift animation)
Next, the shift animation of the reserved display in each performance mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "shift animation" includes an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the first reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward the active display area 5F in response to the start of the variable display of a new special symbol, an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the second reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward a position corresponding to the first reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of the variable display of a new special symbol, an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the third reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward a position corresponding to the second reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of the variable display of a new special symbol, and an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the fourth reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward a position corresponding to the third reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of the variable display of a new special symbol.

As shown in Figures 64, 66 and 67 (B), the shift animation is an animation that is executed when the active display in the active display area 5F disappears (display ends) due to the end animation described above, and the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved (shifted) to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved to the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved to the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved to the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U.

As shown in FIG. 65, when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, the pending display (the pending display in the final state in the appearance animation) is first displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U without executing the appearance animation. From this state, the only shift animation executed is the movement (shift) of the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 57, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory in the active display area 5F and the pending memory display area 5U are spaced apart by a length L1, and in the pending memory display area 5U, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory and the second pending memory, the positions corresponding to the second pending memory and the third pending memory, and the positions corresponding to the third pending memory and the fourth pending memory are each spaced apart by a length L2 (L1>L2) that is shorter than length L1. For this reason, in the shift animation of this embodiment, the pending display that shifts into the active display area 5F as the active display corresponding to the next variable display shifts faster than the other pending displays.

As shown in Figures 64, 65, and 66, in this embodiment, the shift animations in presentation modes A and B have been described, but the shift animations in presentation modes C and D are similar to those in presentation modes A and B, so a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram of the case where the shift animation is executed when there is one reserved memory in presentation mode A, but the shift animation is also executed in the same way when there is one reserved memory in presentation mode B.

(Regarding the display mode of the reserved message when a new reserved message occurs)
Next, the display mode of the reserved display when a new reserved memory is generated by the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole will be explained for each situation. Note that, for the following forms, when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, and the reserved display based on these first special symbol reserved memories will be explained, but the following forms also apply to the presence or absence of the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol, and the reserved display based on these second special symbol reserved memories when the game state is time-saving state or probability variable state.

(Details of shortened appearance animation)
Next, we will explain the shortening of the appearance animation of the reserved display (hereinafter, sometimes called skipping). Note that the following explanation is mainly based on the appearance animation of the performance pattern A, but the appearance animations of the performance patterns B to D are omitted because they differ only in their execution period.

As shown in Figures 68 (A) and 68 (B), when the number of pending memories is 1 or more and a new pending memory occurs, and it is decided not to execute the pending change performance based on that pending memory, the performance control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command based on the occurrence of that pending memory, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the appearance animation of the new pending display from the next image update timing.

Here, as shown in FIG. 68(A), if the period from the start timing of the appearance animation to the start timing of the next variable display is 660 ms or more, images of all frames are displayed in which the pending display moves in a parabola over 660 ms (20 frames) toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, and finally the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, when the next variable display starts, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the display of the shift animation starts on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(B), if the period from the start of the appearance animation to the start of the next variable display is less than 660 ms, the image of an intermediate frame (the image of the 14th frame in FIG. 68(B)) will still be displayed as the appearance animation at the start of the next variable display. Also, when the next variable display starts, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the shift animation from the next image update timing, replacing the appearance animation that had been executed up until then.

At this time, images that have not been displayed as the appearance animation (images from frames 16 to 20 in the diagram of FIG. 68(B)) are not displayed as is, and the display of the shift animation begins. The pending display displayed as the first frame of the shift animation is the same as the final state of the pending display displayed as the appearance animation (the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U). For this reason, when a new variable display begins while an appearance animation is being performed, the player will visually perceive the pending display that had been displayed moving in a parabolic arc as the previous appearance animation to suddenly be displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, transitioning to the shift animation.

In addition, in Figures 68 (A) and 68 (B), a case where a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more and it is decided not to execute the reserved change performance based on the reserved memory is described. However, as shown in Figures 69 (A) and 69 (B), when a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more and it is decided to execute the reserved change performance based on the reserved memory, similar to Figures 68 (A) and 68 (B) above, if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the appearance animation of the blue or red reserved display is executed for 660 ms, while if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the appearance animation of the blue or red reserved display is interrupted (skipped) and a shift animation of the blue or red reserved display is started instead of the appearance animation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 70(A), when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately before the end of the pattern determination period of an already completed variable display, that is, within 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period (when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately before the next variable display), the performance control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command based on the occurrence of the pending memory, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the appearance animation of the new pending display from the next image update timing.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 70(A), variable display based on new reserved memory is started while the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is being drawn, so when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the display of the shift animation starts on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

For this reason, when the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is displayed on the image display device 5, the images of the second to twentieth frames of the appearance animation are not displayed, and the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the image of the twentieth frame of the appearance animation) is displayed as an image shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 70(B), if the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately after the end of the already completed variable display pattern determination period, in other words, if a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period, the performance control CPU 120 will receive a pending memory number notification command and a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the occurrence of the pending memory. This causes the display control unit 123 to prioritize drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

As a result, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, and the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) is displayed as an image that shifts toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display as a shift animation image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 71, if the number of pending memories is 0 and sufficient time has passed since the end of the already-ended variable display pattern determination period, in other words, if a new pending memory occurs more than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period, the performance control CPU 120 will receive a pending memory number notification command and a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the occurrence of the pending memory. This causes the display control unit 123 to prioritize drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

As a result, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, and the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) is displayed as an image that shifts toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display as a shift animation image.

In addition, in a conventional pachinko game machine 1, if the number of reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new reserved memory (N+1th reserved memory) occurs just before the variable display of the special symbol ends, the appearance animation of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory will start at a position corresponding to the N+1th reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U. If the variable display of the new special symbol starts while the appearance animation is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memories up to the Nth reserved memory is moved (shift animation) in the reserved memory display area 5U. At this time, the appearance animation of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory is in progress, so it is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory while continuing the appearance animation (execute the shift animation) (hereinafter, the first proposal) or not move it until the appearance animation is completed (hereinafter, the second proposal).

Here, in the first proposal, the movement display of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory and the appearance animation proceed simultaneously, so there is a problem that both the movement display of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory and the appearance animation are difficult for the player to see. Also, in the second proposal, a situation occurs in which the reserved display is not displayed between the reserved display whose movement display has already been completed and the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U, and if the new reserved memory is the fourth reserved memory, the reserved display does not start moving from the position corresponding to the fourth reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U until the appearance animation is completed, so the player may mistakenly believe that the number of reserved memories is still at the upper limit of four even though the variable display of a new special pattern has begun, and the player may temporarily stop playing.

For the above reasons, in this invention, when a new pending memory occurs while the pending display appearance animation is being executed, the appearance animation is interrupted (skipped), thereby ensuring the visibility of the pending display shift animation and appearance animation while reducing the risk of the player misinterpreting the number of pending displays displayed in the pending memory display area 5U.

The following describes the display mode of the image display device 5, the lighting control of each reserved indicator, and the transmission and reception of commands according to the timing when a new reserved memory is generated, based on Figs. 72 to 85. Note that Figs. 72 to 85 exemplify a state in which the game state is normal, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed, but in the case of a game state in which the time-saving state or the probability of winning state, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, only the target special symbol for the variable display is different, and the display mode of the image display device 5, the lighting control of each reserved indicator, and the transmission and reception of commands are the same, so they will be omitted.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display with 1 to 3 reserved memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
First, as shown in Fig. 72, when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is N (3 ≥ N ≥ 1) and a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt processing as that which determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms pattern determination period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special pattern reserved memory number, and controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory number after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

Since the execution cycle of the interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Note that, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U.

As shown in FIG. 72, if the appearance animation starts when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display, the drawing of the appearance animation image and the appearance animation display period will end before the start of the next variable display, and instead, the drawing of the stay animation image and the stay animation of the pending display displayed by the appearance animation will start.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the dwell animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When the number of reserved memories is between 1 and 3, a new reserved memory occurs, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 73, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory is generated when the number of first special chart reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1), and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.

For example, if a new first special chart reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of first special chart reserved memories is completed, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special chart reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special chart reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt processing as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special chart reserved memory).

When the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first reserved memory number, and controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory number after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

Since the execution cycle of the interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the drawing period of the first frame image of the appearance animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, a shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation, and a new variable display is started within a period of less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, so that the pending display begins to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation only needs to shift the pending display excluding the newly started pending display.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory count notification command during the display period of the appearance animation, so the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation starts.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the pending display appearance animation ends midway through to the player, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation, as if a shift animation were being executed.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the end of a variable display with 1 to 3 reserved memories and the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 74, a case will be explained in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the next variable display has begun.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first special pattern reserved memory count, and controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory count after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern, transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory count notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory during the execution of the shift animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position according to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position according to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the variable display of 1 to 3 reserved memories ends and the next variable display starts)
Next, as shown in Figure 75, a case will be explained in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and after the variable display of the first special pattern ends, a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first special pattern reserved memory count, and controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory count after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern, transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory count notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory, it identifies the number of first special chart reserved memories from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special chart reserved memories. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the reserved display begins to move toward a position according to the number N of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position according to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the variable display with 1 to 3 reserved memories, until the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 76, we will explain the case where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and after the variable display of the first special pattern ends, a new first special pattern reserved memory is generated less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories reaches N (3≧N≧1), the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the pattern determination period ends within 33 ms from the occurrence of a new reserved memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first symbol memories and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

Since the execution cycle of the interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the drawing period of the first frame image of the appearance animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display starts within a period of less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, and the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation only needs to shift the pending display excluding the newly started pending display.

(If a new start win occurs while the number of reserved memories is variable and displayed as 4)
Next, as shown in Figure 77, a case will be explained in which a new start winning (winning into the first start winning slot) occurs while the number of first special chart reserved memories is variable displayed as four.

As shown in FIG. 77, if a new start winning occurs during the variable display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories of four, no new first special symbol reserved memories will be generated because the number of first special symbol reserved memories is already at the maximum number of four. Therefore, when the variable display and pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of first special symbol reserved memories and controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (three). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start designation and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during the shift animation of the next variable display after the number of reserved memories has changed to four)
Next, as shown in Figure 78, a case will be explained in which a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of the first special pattern with four first special pattern reserved memories has ended and the next variable display has begun.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved patterns (three) after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory during the execution of the shift animation, it identifies the number of first special chart reserved memories from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special chart reserved memories (4). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories, which is 4.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories (4).

(If a new start win occurs during the pattern determination period after the pending memory number is displayed as 4)
Next, as shown in Figure 79, a case will be explained in which a new start winning (winning at the first start winning slot) occurs during the pattern determination period after the number of first special pattern reserved memories is displayed as four.

As shown in FIG. 79, during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the first special pattern reserved memory number is four, the state of four first special pattern reserved memory number is maintained. Also, since the upper limit of the first special pattern reserved memory number is four, even if a new start winning (a winning at the first start winning port) occurs during the pattern determination period, a new first special pattern reserved memory is not generated. Therefore, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first special pattern reserved memory number and executes lighting control of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (three). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start designation and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms of the start of the next variable display after the number of reserved memories is four)
Next, as shown in Figure 80, a case will be explained in which after the variable display of four first special chart reserved memories has ended, a new first special chart reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved patterns (three) after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (4) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory, it identifies the number of first special chart reserved memories from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special chart reserved memories (4). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the reserved display begins to move toward a position in the reserved memory display area 5U according to the number of reserved memories, which is 4.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories (4).

(When a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display with 0 reserved memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 81, a case will be explained in which a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display in which the number of reserved memories of the first special chart is 0, and the appearance animation starts at a timing more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.
First, as shown in Fig. 81, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs while the number of first special symbol reserved memories is variably displayed as 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interruption process as that which determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms pattern determination period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction (0 symbols). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Note that, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, which is one.

As shown in FIG. 81, if the appearance animation starts when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display, the drawing of the appearance animation image and the appearance animation display period will end before the start of the next variable display, and instead, the drawing of the stay animation image and the stay animation of the pending display displayed by the appearance animation will start.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (0). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the dwell animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation is started.

(When the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory is generated, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 82, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory is generated when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.

For example, if a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the end of the variable display when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined).

When the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved patterns after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the display period of the appearance animation, so the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the first special chart reserved memory number (0), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation starts.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the pending display appearance animation ends midway through to the player, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation, as if a shift animation were being executed.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period of a variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Figure 83, a case will be explained in which a new first special pattern reserved memory is generated within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 0.

First, when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the pattern determination period, the CPU 103 does not control the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special pattern reserved memory, but instead adds 1 to the number of first special pattern reserved memories and subtracts 1 from the number of first special pattern reserved memories, and starts the variable display of the new special pattern (first special pattern). Based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern, the CPU 103 transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special chart reserved memory count notification command, it does not control the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the first special chart reserved memory count, but instead controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, the pending display is not moved (appearance animation) toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, but the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, the pending display is moved (shifted) toward the active display area 5F immediately after it starts to be displayed.

(If a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms until the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Figure 84, a case will be described in which a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of a first special pattern in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 0.

First, as shown in Fig. 84, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the end of the variable display when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined).

When the pattern determination period ends within 33 ms from the occurrence of a new reserved memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved first symbols after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the drawing period of the first frame image of the appearance animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display starts within a period of less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, and the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (one) in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, as a shift animation in this case, the newly displayed pending display is shifted toward the active display area 5F.

(When a new reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Fig. 85, a case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern with the number of first special pattern reserved memories being 0 will be described. First, as shown in Fig. 85, when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern reserved memory with the number of first special pattern reserved memories being 0, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the number of first special pattern reserved memories and then subtracts 1 from the number of first special pattern reserved memories, and starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern) without executing the lighting control of the first reserved display unit 25A according to the reserved memory number (1) including the new first special pattern reserved memory, and transmits a first variable display start designation and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the first special pattern in this embodiment involves turning on one of the eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A for 40 ms, then changing the LED to be turned on at 40 ms intervals, and repeating this cycle (320 ms) until all eight LEDs have been turned on.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special pattern reserved memory number notification command, it starts the variable display of the sub-patterns while not controlling the lighting of the first sub-reserved indicator 151A according to the first special pattern reserved memory number, and controls the display control unit 123 to start drawing the shift animation image. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, the pending display is not moved (appearance animation) to a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, but the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the sub-symbols in this embodiment involves repeatedly turning on and off the LEDs that make up the first performance indicator light 152A at 240 ms intervals (one cycle: 480 ms).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the number of first special reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, and a demo movie display is being displayed as a guide display for adjusting the performance, as shown in Figures 86(A) to 86(C), when a new reserved memory is generated by the game ball entering the first starting hole, the variable display of the first special symbol is first started. At this time, the CPU 103 updates the count value of the first special reserved memory number from 0 to 1 in the starting hole switch passing process, and updates the count value of the first special reserved memory number from 1 to 0 in the normal special symbol processing executed in the same interrupt as the starting hole switch passing process, so that the LED constituting the first reserved indicator 25A does not light up (light up in a manner indicating that the number of first special reserved memories is 1).

In addition, in the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 1. However, in the special pattern buffer shift process executed in the same interrupt as the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 0. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 receives the reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 1 and the reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 0 in the same interrupt. As a result, the LED constituting the first sub-reserved indicator 151A does not light up (light up in a manner indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 1), and further, the display of the number of reserved first special pattern memories in the display area 5S is not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the CPU 103 sets special pattern display control data for performing variable display of special patterns in the special pattern display control process in the output buffer for setting special pattern display control data (setting each bit of the output port DG1 shown in FIG. 21 to "1" or "0"), thereby starting the variable display of the special patterns.

Next, as shown in Figures 87(D) to 87(F), when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a variable pattern designation command or a first variable display start designation, it starts controlling the turning on and off of the LEDs that constitute the first performance indicator light 152A as a variable display of the sub-pattern. Note that the variable pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation are commands that the CPU 103 sends to the performance control CPU 120 during the variable pattern setting process.

When 33 ms to 66 ms have elapsed since the performance control CPU 120 received the variable pattern designation command or the first variable display start designation, the demo movie display fades out and then disappears, and the normal background image and decorative pattern are displayed. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a completed state in the pending memory display area 5U without going through the appearance animation (see Figure 87 (E)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), the pending display starts moving to the active display area 5F as a shift animation in the pending memory display area 5U. Also, as the shift animation starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, and the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts. Although not shown in detail, when the scrolling display starts, the decorative symbols start moving downwards at a slow speed, and then the moving display speed increases to medium and high speeds, and the transparency gradually increases as they fade out.

In the present embodiment, the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts after the variable display of the small pattern starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scrolling display of the decorative pattern may not start until the shift animation ends after the variable display of the small pattern starts, and a change start action (not shown) of the decorative pattern may start. The change start action may be, for example, a pre-action such as a character displayed in the decorative pattern moving, or the decorative pattern moving upward once before moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 88(G) to FIG. 88(I), when a new reserved memory is generated by the game ball entering the first start hole during the variable display of the first special symbol following FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the CPU 103 updates the first special symbol reserved memory count value to 1 in the start hole switch passing process. Note that, since the CPU 103 does not update the first special symbol reserved memory count value to 0 in the same interrupt as the start hole switch passing process, the CPU 103 sets bit 0 of the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 21 to 0 and bit 3 to 1 in the display process. As a result, the LED constituting the first reserved display 25A starts to light up (light up in a manner indicating that the first special symbol reserved memory count is 1) based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory. Also, at this time, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol reserved memory count is 1 to the performance control CPU 120.

Next, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command from the CPU 103 corresponding to the number of first special chart reserved memories being one, it lights up the LED constituting the first sub-reserved display 151A in a manner corresponding to the number of first special chart reserved memories being one. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance updates the display of the number of first special chart reserved memories in the display area 5S to "1". In other words, in this embodiment, when a new reserved memory is generated, the display of the number of first special chart reserved memories in the display area 5S is updated from a timing later than the timing of lighting the LED of the first reserved display 25A, so that the player can visually confirm the display of the number of first special chart reserved memories in the display area 5S after confirming that the game ball has won, making it easy to understand that the number of reserved memories has increased.

Then, as shown in Figures 89 (J) to (L), in the image display device 5, an animation of the pending display appearing is started in response to the newly generated pending memory.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, the hold change effect, the winning flash effect, the button vibration effect, and the appearance animation can each be executed based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory. Of these, the hold change effect is an effect executed from the occurrence of the reserved memory to the timing when the variable display of the pre-read target (variable display based on the reserved memory) stops, the winning flash effect is an effect executed from the occurrence of the reserved memory to the timing when the variable display of the pre-read target (variable display based on the reserved memory) reaches, the button vibration effect is an effect executed for a certain period of time (e.g., 3000 ms) from the occurrence of the reserved memory, and the appearance animation is an effect executed for a maximum of 600 ms from the occurrence of the reserved memory.

Each of these effects can be executed regardless of the effect mode being any of effect modes A to D. Furthermore, the hold change effect, the winning flash effect, and the button vibration effect are all effects that will not be interrupted even if the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command, whereas the appearance animation is an effect that is interrupted when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command.

In other words, the reserved change effect, the winning flash effect, and the button vibration effect are effects that are executed to the end without being interrupted by the effect control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start command, etc., regardless of whether the timing at which a new reserved memory occurs during the variable display of a special pattern with a reserved memory count of N (3≧N≧1) is a timing more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation, a timing less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation, or a timing within 330 ms from the start of the shift animation when the variable display of a special pattern with a reserved memory count of N has ended and the shift animation has ended.

In the above, as shown in FIG. 86(B), an example of the presentation operation was described in which a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start hole when the number of first reserved memory is 0, the variable display is not being executed, and a demo movie display is being displayed as a guide display for adjusting the presentation. However, the same applies to an example of the presentation operation in which a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start hole when the number of first reserved memory is 0, the variable display is not being executed, and a menu guide display and a volume/light quantity guide display are being displayed during the period before the demo movie display starts, as shown in, for example, FIG. 90(A) to FIG. 90(C) and FIG. 91(D) to FIG. 91(E).

(Mode of superimposed display of hold display)
Next, based on Figure 96, we will explain the reserved display in presentation modes C and D when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the pattern determination period for the variable display of first special patterns when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is four has ended.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), during the variable display, the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and the reserved display is displayed in the first to fourth display positions in the reserved memory display area 5U. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), when the variable display ends, an ending animation for the active display is executed during the pattern determination period, and the active display fades out and becomes invisible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), when a new variable display corresponding to the pending display displayed in the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U is started, a shift animation display is started in which the pending display displayed in the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves (shifts) to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed in the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed in the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), if a new pending memory occurs immediately after a new variable display is started, for example, before 33 ms has elapsed since the new variable display was started, an animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory will start at the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, the shift animation of the fourth hold display moving towards the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the third hold display image drawing area, while the appearance animation of the new hold display appearing at the fourth display position in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the fourth hold display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third hold display image drawing area.

In other words, when a pending display that is already displayed in the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has begun to move toward the third display position is displayed superimposed on a pending display that is newly displayed in the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display that is the subject of the shift animation is displayed with priority over the pending display that is the subject of the appearance animation, so it is possible to recognize that the pending display has moved from the fourth display position to the third display position due to the shift animation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), as the shift animation moves the hold display from the fourth display position to the third display position, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the appearance animation of the new hold display becomes visible.

In addition, in FIG. 96, the mode of the reserved display in the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms from the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is four in presentation modes C and D was explained. However, as shown in FIG. 97, in the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms from the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is three in presentation modes C and D, the only difference is the display position where the new reserved display is displayed. The other display modes are almost the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, although not specifically shown, in presentation modes C and D, when a new first special reserved memory occurs before 33 ms has elapsed since the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern when the number of first special reserved memories is one or two, only the display position where the new reserved display is displayed differs, and other display modes are almost the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, in performance modes C and D, the reserved display in the case where the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern with three reserved first special patterns has ended and a new reserved first special pattern memory occurs less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display will be explained with reference to FIG. 98.

As shown in FIG. 98(A), during the variable display, the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and the reserved display is displayed in the first to third display positions in the reserved memory display area 5U. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), when the variable display ends, an ending animation for the active display is executed during the pattern determination period, and the active display fades out and becomes invisible.

Here, if a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs just before the end of the pattern determination period, that is, less than 33 ms before a new variable display corresponding to the reserved display displayed at the first display position in the reserved memory display area 5U starts, the reserved display corresponding to the new first special pattern reserved memory will not be displayed until the new variable display starts.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a shift animation display is started in which the pending display displayed in the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed in the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U, and at the same time, a pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U. In this case, the pending display is displayed as the final state of the appearance animation without executing the appearance animation.

Here, the shift animation of the third hold display moving towards the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the second hold display image drawing area, while the new hold display appearing at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the third hold display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second hold display image drawing area.

In other words, when a pending display that is already displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has begun to move toward the second display position is displayed superimposed on a pending display that is newly displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display that is the subject of the shift animation is displayed with priority over the newly appearing pending display, so it is possible to recognize that the pending display has been moved from the third display position to the second display position by the shift animation.

Then, as shown in Figures 98 (D) and (E), as the hold display moves from the third display position to the second display position through the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the new hold display becomes visible.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, the appearance animation state is described when one game ball enters one of the start ports and a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is N (3 ≧ N ≧ 1) and the variable display is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example, as shown in FIG. 99, when two game balls enter the start port consecutively, the first and second new reserved memories are generated just before the variable display ends, and if the appearance animation of the reserved display based on these reserved memories starts less than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed based on the first reserved memory at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories N + 1 in the reserved memory display area 5U, and the reserved display is changed to the final state based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start command, and the appearance animation is executed based on the second reserved memory at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories N + 2 in the reserved memory display area 5U, and the reserved display is changed to the final state based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start command.

In addition, if the first and second new pending memories occur immediately after the start of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories starts more than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed based on the first pending memory at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation, and the appearance animation is executed based on the second pending memory at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation.

In addition, if the first new pending memory occurs just before the end of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on that pending memory starts less than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, and the second new pending memory occurs after the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the first pending memory, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start command, and the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the second pending memory, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory occurs when the variable display of special patterns is not being executed, a reserved display based on the new reserved memory is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U, and the reserved display is shifted (activated) to the active display area 5F by executing a shift animation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figures 100(A) and 100(B), when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory occurs when the variable display of special patterns is not being executed, the reserved display may be directly specified to be displayed in the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display without executing the appearance animation or shift animation.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the display period of one cycle of the pause animation in the hold display is 2970 ms, the display period of the shift animation in the hold display is 330 ms, and the display period of the end animation in the active display is 165 ms. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, the display period of one cycle of the pause animation in the hold display may be an integer number of seconds (e.g., 3000 ms, 6000 ms, etc.).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the display period of the hold display shift animation and the active display end animation are both less than 1000 ms, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display period of at least one of the hold display shift animation and the active display end animation may be 1000 ms or more.

Up to this point, we have mainly been explaining the animations of the pending and active displays, but from here on, we will explain the features of the effects during the variable display of this gaming machine. In particular, we will explain the distinctive points of the effects during the variable display that focus on the voice output of the characters.

The following explains the form of the effects that are displayed during variable display.

(SKY2022-1204) The gaming machine of type 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
It has a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the average fluctuation time in the special state is shorter than the average fluctuation time in the normal state,
When the effect identification information becomes a reach state, a specific effect is executed in which a sound corresponding to the reach is output and a character corresponding to the reach is displayed;
The execution rate of the specific effect when the effect identification information becomes a reach state in the normal state is higher than the execution rate of the specific effect when the effect identification information becomes a reach state in the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these characteristics, since the special state has a better fluctuation efficiency than the normal state, the proportion of specific effects can be lowered to avoid annoying the player by frequently notifying the player with audio and subtitles, and since the normal state has a longer fluctuation time, the proportion of specific effects can be increased to prevent the player from becoming bored by executing more effects.As a result, a suitable design can be achieved according to the situation, and a gaming machine with improvements in the voice output of characters can be provided.
The voice corresponding to the reach and the text display corresponding to the reach are
Voice corresponding to reach: Reach Text corresponding to reach: Reach (or REACH)
Even if the audio and display are the same,
Sound corresponding to reach: Gekiatsu Text corresponding to reach: Reach (or REACH)
In this way, the audio and the display may be different.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 238

(SKY2022-1205) The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
a first pattern in which a specific sound corresponding to the reach is outputted and specific characters corresponding to the reach are displayed when the effect identification information becomes a reach state, and a second pattern in which a specific sound corresponding to the reach is outputted and a special display that is more noticeable than the specific character display is displayed when the effect identification information becomes a reach state,
The second pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern.
It is characterized by the following.
With these features, it is possible to draw attention to which pattern will be executed; in the first pattern, both the text and sound correspond to the reach, so that the same information is recognized visually and aurally; in the second pattern, the sound corresponds to the reach, and a special display is combined, so that different information is recognized visually and aurally, so that it is possible to change the way the presentation is presented, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of the characters.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 239

(SKY2022-1206) The gaming machine of type 3-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state,
In the normal state, a first period from when the performance identification information becomes a reach state until when the specific notification performance is executed is longer than a second period from when the performance identification information becomes a reach state until when the special notification performance is executed in the special state;
an output ratio of the voice of the character in the first period is higher than an output ratio of the voice of the character in the second period;
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, in a special state, since the period from when the reach state is reached to when the special notification performance is executed is short, it may be difficult to recognize the sound, so the output rate is lowered, whereas in a normal state, since the period from when the reach state is reached to when the specific notification performance is executed is long, it is easier to recognize the sound, so the output rate is increased, allowing for a design that is appropriate for the situation, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 240 to 243

(SKY2022-1207) The gaming machine of type 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
a first pattern in which a sound is output during a period from when the effect identification information becomes a reach state until the specific notification effect is executed, and a specific character display corresponding to the sound is displayed; and a second pattern in which a sound is output during a period from when the effect identification information becomes a reach state until the specific notification effect is executed, and a special display that is more noticeable than the specific character display is displayed.
The second pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern.
It is characterized by the following.
These features make it possible to draw attention to which pattern will be executed; the first pattern allows the player to perceive the same information visually and aurally through text and sound, while the second pattern is composed of sound and a special display, allowing the player to perceive different information visually and aurally, thereby bringing about changes in the way the presentation is presented, and as a result, a gaming machine with improved sound output can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 240 to 243

(SKY2022-1208) The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
a first pattern in which a first character display corresponding to reach is performed when the effect identification information becomes a reach state, and a second character display different from the first character display is performed during the period after the reach state is reached and before the specific notification effect is executed; and a second pattern in which the first character display corresponding to reach is performed when the effect identification information becomes a reach state, and no character display including the first character display and the second character display is performed during the period after the reach state is reached and before the specific notification effect is executed.
The first pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second pattern.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a reach state is reached, the first character display corresponding to the reach is displayed, and it is easier to control the state to an advantageous state if the second character display is displayed during the period until the specific notification performance is started thereafter, so that attention can be drawn to whether the second character display is displayed or not, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the voice output of the characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 240 to 243

(SKY2022-1209) The gaming machine of type 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
a first pattern in which a first sound corresponding to a reach is output when the performance identification information becomes a reach state, and a second sound different from the first sound is output during a period after the reach state is reached and before the specific notification performance is executed; and a second pattern in which the first sound corresponding to a reach is output when the performance identification information becomes a reach state, and no sound including the first sound and the second sound is output during a period after the reach state is reached and before the specific notification performance is executed.
The first pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second pattern.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a reach state is reached, a first sound corresponding to the reach is output, and since it is easier to control the state to an advantageous state if a second sound is output during the period until the specific notification performance is started, attention can be drawn to whether the second sound is output or not, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 240 to 243

(SKY2022-1210) The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
a first pattern in which, when the effect identification information becomes a reach state, a first character display corresponding to the reach is performed and a first sound corresponding to the reach is output, and, during a period after the reach state is reached and until the specific notification effect is executed, a second character display different from the first character display and a second sound different from the first sound is output; and a second pattern in which, when the effect identification information becomes a reach state, the first character display corresponding to the reach is performed and the first sound corresponding to the reach is output, and, during a period after the reach state is reached and until the specific notification effect is executed, a character display including the first character display and the second character display is not performed and a sound including the first sound and the second sound is not output.
The first pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second pattern.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a reach state is reached, the first character display corresponding to the reach is displayed and the first sound is output, and then during the period until the specific notification performance is started, the second character display is displayed and the second sound is output, which makes it easier to control the state into an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether the second character display is displayed and the second sound is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 240 to 243

(SKY2022-1211) The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
As a pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed, there are a first pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after the effect identification information becomes a reach state, and a second pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after the previous stage effect is executed,
The second pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern,
In the first pattern, when the effect identification information indicates a reach, a sound corresponding to the reach is output;
In the second pattern, a sound corresponding to the first stage performance is output,
an output period of the sound in the second pattern is longer than an output period of the sound in the first pattern;
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, for the second pattern, which has a high expectation, the sound output period is made longer than for the first pattern, thereby creating the impression that the preliminary performance has been executed, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of the sound output of the characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 173, Figure 248, Figure 249

(SKY2022-1212) The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
As a pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed, there are a first pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after the effect identification information becomes a reach state, and a second pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after the previous stage effect is executed,
The second pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern,
In the first pattern, when the performance identification information is a reach, a sound corresponding to the reach is output by a voice of a specific character, and then, during the period until the specific notification performance is executed, the specific character is not displayed,
In the second pattern, a sound corresponding to the first stage performance is output by a sound of the specific character, and then the specific character is displayed during a period until the specific notification performance is executed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, for the second pattern which has a high expectation, the specific character is displayed after the voice of the specific character is output, thereby increasing the interest in the period until the specific notification performance is executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improvements in terms of the voice output of the characters.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 173, Figure 248, Figure 249

(SKY2022-1213) The gaming machine of type 10-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There is a first situation in which character display is performed, and a second situation in which character display is performed,
In the first situation, displaying the character display without changing the size;
In the second situation, the character display can be displayed while changing its size;
In the first situation, a sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts;
In the second situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts, and the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display is displayed at a fixed size.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, in a situation where the characters are displayed in a changing size, if the corresponding sound is output before the character display reaches a fixed size, there will be a difference in the time it takes for the player to recognize the display and the time it takes for the player to recognize the sound. Therefore, by outputting sound corresponding to the character display when the character display reaches a fixed size, and further by producing sound effects to liven up the second situation when the character display begins, the series of events in the second situation can be suitably portrayed, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1214) The gaming machine of type 11-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There is a first situation in which character display is performed, and a second situation in which character display is performed,
In the first situation, displaying the character display without changing the position;
In the second situation, displaying the character display while changing its position;
In the first situation, a sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts;
In the second situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts, and a sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display is displayed at a fixed position.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, in a situation where characters are displayed in a changing position, if the corresponding sound is output before the characters are displayed in a fixed position, there will be a difference in the time between when the player can recognize the display and when he or she recognizes the sound. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the character display when the characters are displayed in a fixed position, and further by producing sound effects to liven up the second situation when the characters begin to be displayed, the series of events in the second situation can be suitably presented. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1215) The gaming machine of type 12-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There is a first situation in which character display is performed, and a second situation in which character display is performed,
In the first situation, a character display is displayed without an effect display;
In the second situation, displaying a character display accompanied by an effect display;
In the first situation, a sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts;
In the second situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a first timing when the effect display and the character display are started, and the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a second timing when the visibility of the character display is better than that of the first timing.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such features, in a situation where text is displayed together with an effect display, if the corresponding sound is output before the text display has good visibility, there will be a difference in the time between when the player can recognize the display and when he or she recognizes the sound. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the text display when visibility is good, and further, by producing a sound effect to liven up the second situation when the text display begins, the series of events in the second situation can be suitably presented. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1216) The gaming machine of type 13-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There is a first situation in which character display is performed, and a second situation in which character display is performed,
In the first situation, displaying the character display without displaying it in a stepwise manner;
In the second situation, the character display is displayed in a stepwise manner;
In the first situation, a sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts;
In the second situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when a part of the character display is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the entire character display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, in a situation where characters are displayed in stages, if the corresponding sound is output before the entire character display is displayed, there will be a difference in the time between when the player can recognize the display and when he or she recognizes the sound. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the character display when the entire character display is displayed, and further by producing sound effects to liven up the second situation when character display begins, it is possible to ideally present the series of events in the second situation. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1217) The gaming machine of type 14-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There are certain situations where text is displayed.
In the specific situation, displaying a character display while changing the size;
In the specific situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts, and then the sound effect is continuously output, and at a timing when the character display is displayed at a fixed size, the sound corresponding to the character display is output in a manner that prioritizes the sound effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, in a situation where the characters are displayed in a changing size, if the corresponding sound is output before the character display reaches a fixed size, there will be a difference in the time between the time it takes for the player to recognize the display and the time it takes for the player to recognize the sound, so the sound corresponding to the character display is output when the character display reaches a fixed size.Furthermore, by producing a sound effect when the character display begins to liven up the specific situation, the sound corresponding to the character display is preferentially output while the sound effect is being output, so that the series of events in the specific situation can be ideally presented, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of the characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1218) The gaming machine of type 15-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There are certain situations where text is displayed.
In the specific situation, displaying the character display while changing its position;
In the specific situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when the character display starts, and then the sound effect is continuously output, and at a timing when the character display is displayed at a fixed position, the sound corresponding to the character display is output in a manner that prioritizes the sound effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such features, in a situation where characters are displayed in a changing position, if the corresponding sound is output before the character display is displayed in a fixed position, there will be a difference in the time between when the player can recognize the display and when he recognizes the sound. Therefore, sound corresponding to the character display is output when the character display is displayed in a fixed position. Furthermore, by outputting a sound effect to enhance the specific situation when the sound effect is being output, the sequence of events in the specific situation can be suitably presented. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1219) The gaming machine of type 16-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There are certain situations where text is displayed.
In the specific situation, displaying a character display accompanied by an effect display;
In the specific situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a first timing when the effect display and the character display are started, and then the sound effect is continuously output, and at a second timing when the visibility of the character display is better than at the first timing, the sound corresponding to the character display is output in a manner that prioritizes the sound effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, in a situation where text is displayed together with an effect display, if the corresponding sound is output before the text display has good visibility, there will be a difference in the time between when the player can recognize the display and when he or she recognizes the sound, so the sound corresponding to the text display is output at a time when visibility is good.Furthermore, by producing a sound effect when the text display begins, the specific situation can be enhanced by producing a sound effect, and by preferentially outputting the sound corresponding to the text display while the sound effect is being output, the series of events in the specific situation can be suitably presented, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1220) The gaming machine of type 17-1 is,
A gaming machine,
There are certain situations where text is displayed.
In the specific situation, the character display is displayed in a stepwise manner;
In the specific situation, a sound effect different from the sound corresponding to the character display is output at a timing when a part of the character display is displayed, and then the sound effect is continuously output, and at a timing when the entire character display is displayed, the sound corresponding to the character display is output in a manner that prioritizes the sound effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, in a situation where characters are displayed in stages, if the corresponding sound is output before the entire character display is displayed, there will be a difference in the time between when the player can recognize the display and when he recognizes the sound. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the character display when the entire character display is displayed, and by outputting a sound effect to enhance the specific situation when the sound effect is being output, the sequence of events in the specific situation can be suitably presented. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 178 to 181, Figures 226 to 231

(SKY2022-1221) The gaming machine of type 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
In a specific variation in a normal state, the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, the sound of a specific character can be output in various situations, such as when the specific character is displayed and when it is not displayed, and further, by increasing the number of times the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, more attention can be drawn to the specific character. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 16 and 47 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 47
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1222) The gaming machine of type 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The special notification effect is an effect that can notify the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
In a specific variation in the special state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, the sound of a specific character can be output in various situations, such as when the specific character is displayed and when it is not displayed, and further, by increasing the number of times the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, more attention can be drawn to the specific character. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between the sub-variation patterns 78 and 88 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 78
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Sub-variation pattern 88
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1223) The gaming machine of type 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
The special notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a specific variation in the normal state, the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is not displayed;
In a specific variation in the special state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, the sound of a specific character can be output in various situations, such as when the specific character is displayed and when it is not displayed, and further, by increasing the number of times the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, more attention can be drawn to the specific character. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 16, 47, 78, and 88 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 47
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 78
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Sub-variation pattern 88
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1224) The gaming machine of type 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
A first variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in a normal state to be controlled to an advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to an advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state,
In both the first variation pattern for normal state and the second variation pattern for normal state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is not displayed,
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the normal state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the normal state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, attention can be drawn to the number of times a specific character is displayed and the sound of that specific character is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 16 and 47 corresponds to each other.
Sub-fluctuation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 47>Sub-fluctuation pattern 16
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1225) The gaming machine of type 22-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The special notification effect is an effect that can notify the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is not displayed;
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the special state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, attention can be drawn to the number of times a specific character is displayed and the sound of that specific character is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between the sub-variation patterns 78 and 88 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Number of times the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 88>Sub-fluctuation pattern 78
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1226) The gaming machine of type 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
The special notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A first variation pattern for a normal state that notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state;
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for normal state and the second variation pattern for normal state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is not displayed,
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the normal state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the normal state;
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is not displayed;
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the special state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, attention can be drawn to the number of times a specific character is displayed and the sound of that specific character is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 16, 47, 78, and 88 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 78 (SP Reach C Missed)
Number of times the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Sub-variation pattern 88 (SP Reach C Big Hit)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 47>Sub-fluctuation pattern 16
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-variation pattern 88>Sub-variation pattern 78
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1227) The gaming machine of type 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
In a specific change in the normal state, a specific notification effect can be executed that can notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the specific notification performance is being performed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the specific notification performance is being performed,
the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during the period from the start of the specific variation to the execution of the specific notification performance is greater than the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during the period in which the specific notification performance is executed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, during the period from the start of a specific variation to the execution of a specific notification performance, the sound of the specific character is output more frequently when the specific character is not displayed, compared to the period during which the specific notification performance is being executed; and during the period during which the specific notification performance is being executed, the sound of the specific character is output more frequently when the specific character is displayed, compared to the period from the start of a specific variation to the execution of a specific notification performance. This makes it possible to differentiate between the period during which the specific notification performance is executed and the period from the start of a specific variation to the execution of a specific notification performance, making it easier to draw attention to the specific character during the period during which the specific notification performance is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 16 corresponds to the following:
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (5 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (5 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (4 times)
In addition, the following relationships in sub-variation pattern 47 correspond to the following points.
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (5 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (6 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (4 times)
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1228) The gaming machine of type 25-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the special state, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
The special notification effect is an effect that can notify the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the special notification performance is being performed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the special notification performance is being performed,
the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during the period from the start of the specific variation to the execution of the special notification performance is greater than the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during the period during which the special notification performance is executed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, during the period from the start of a specific variation to the execution of a special notification effect, the sound of a specific character is output more frequently when the specific character is not displayed, compared to the period during which the special notification effect is being executed; and during the period during which the special notification effect is being executed, the sound of a specific character is output more frequently when the specific character is displayed, compared to the period from the start of a specific variation to the execution of a special notification effect. This makes it possible to differentiate between the period during which the special notification effect is executed and the period from the start of a specific variation to the execution of a special notification effect, making it easier to draw attention to the specific character during the period during which the special notification effect is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 78 corresponds to the following:
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (4 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (4 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (3 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 88 correspond to the following points.
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (4 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (6 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (3 times)
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1229) The gaming machine of type 26-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the normal state, a specific notification effect can be executed that can notify that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the specific notification performance is being performed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the specific notification performance is being performed from the start of the specific variation in the normal state until the specific notification performance is performed;
the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during the period in which the specific notification performance is being executed is greater than the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during the period in which the specific notification performance is being executed,
In a specific change in the special state, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
The special notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the special notification performance is being executed is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a period in which the special notification performance is being executed,
the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during a period from the start of a specific change in the special state until the special notification performance is executed is greater than the number of times that the sound of the specific character is output in a situation where the specific character is not displayed during a period during which the special notification performance is executed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, during the period from the start of a specific change until the execution of a specific notification performance (special notification performance), the voice of the specific character is output more frequently when the specific character is not displayed, compared to the period during which the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is being executed; and during the period during which the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is being executed, the voice of the specific character is output more frequently when the specific character is displayed, compared to the period from the start of a specific change until the execution of a specific notification performance (special notification performance). This makes it possible to differentiate between the period during which the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed and the period from the start of a specific change until the specific notification performance (special notification performance), making it easier to draw attention to the specific character during the period during which the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 16 corresponds to the following:
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (5 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (5 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (4 times)
In addition, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 47 corresponds to the following:
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (5 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (6 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (4 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 78 correspond to the corresponding points.
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (4 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (4 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (3 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 88 correspond to the following points.
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (4 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (6 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (3 times)
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1230) The gaming machine of type 27-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
In a specific variation in a normal state, the number of times that a sound of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a sound different from the sound of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, there are cases where a sound different from the sound of a specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, but by increasing the number of times the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention to the specific character, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 16 and 47 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that voices other than Mumu are output when Mumu is displayed: 2 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1231) The gaming machine of type 28-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The special notification effect is an effect that can notify the user of the advantageous state by using a specific character,
In a specific variation in the special state, the number of times that a voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, there are cases where a sound different from the sound of a specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, but by increasing the number of times the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention to the specific character, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 77 and 87 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1232) The gaming machine of type 29-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The special notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In a specific variation in the normal state, the number of times that a sound of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a sound different from the sound of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed;
In a specific variation in the special state, the number of times that a voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, there are cases where a sound different from the sound of a specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, but by increasing the number of times the sound of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention to the specific character, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 16, 47, 77, and 87 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 2 times Sub-fluctuation pattern 77 (SP Reach C Missed)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1233) The gaming machine of type 30-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A first variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state;
In both the first variation pattern for normal state and the second variation pattern for normal state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed;
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the normal state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the normal state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, attention can be drawn to the number of times a specific character is displayed and the sound of that specific character is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 16 and 47 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 2 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 47>Sub-fluctuation pattern 16
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1234) The gaming machine of type 31-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The special notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed;
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the special state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, attention can be drawn to the number of times a specific character is displayed and the sound of that specific character is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 77 and 87 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 87>Sub-fluctuation pattern 77
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1235) The gaming machine of type 32-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The special notification effect is an effect capable of notifying the user that the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A first variation pattern for a normal state that notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state;
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for normal state and the second variation pattern for normal state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed;
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the normal state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the normal state;
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed is greater than the number of times that a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed;
The number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the first variation pattern for the special state is greater than the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output in a situation in which the specific character is displayed in the second variation pattern for the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, attention can be drawn to the number of times a specific character is displayed and the sound of that specific character is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 16, 47, 77, and 87 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 2 times Sub-fluctuation pattern 77 (SP Reach C Missed)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 47>Sub-fluctuation pattern 16
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: Sub-fluctuation pattern 87>Sub-fluctuation pattern 77
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1236) The gaming machine of type 33-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
In a specific variation in a normal state, when a voice of the character is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice when the voice of the character is output.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, by dynamically displaying the character's mouth while the character's voice is being output, the character becomes animated and the interest in the game is increased; by displaying the character's mouth still at appropriate times, the presentation is more vivid than if the character's mouth were constantly moving dynamically, thereby increasing the interest in the game; and by dynamically displaying the character's mouth more frequently, it becomes easier to focus on the character, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 22 and 53 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 22 (SP reach B miss)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving: 10 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 53 (SP Reach B jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving while speaking: 13 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: 8 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1237) The gaming machine of type 34-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific variation in the special state, when a voice of the character is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice of the character.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, by dynamically displaying the character's mouth while the character's voice is being output, the character becomes animated and the interest in the game is increased; by displaying the character's mouth still at appropriate times, the presentation is more vivid than if the character's mouth were constantly moving dynamically, thereby increasing the interest in the game; and by dynamically displaying the character's mouth more frequently, it becomes easier to focus on the character, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 77 and 87 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Number of scenes where the character's mouth is moving: 6 times Number of scenes where the character's mouth is still: 5 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking moves: 8 times Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking remains still: 4 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1238) The gaming machine of type 35-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In the specific variation in the normal state, when the voice of the character is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice of the character,
In a specific variation in the special state, when the voice of the character is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, by dynamically displaying the character's mouth while the character's voice is being output, the character becomes animated and the interest in the game is increased; by displaying the character's mouth still at appropriate times, the presentation is more vivid than if the character's mouth were constantly moving dynamically, thereby increasing the interest in the game; and by dynamically displaying the character's mouth more frequently, it becomes easier to focus on the character, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 22, 53, 77, and 87 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 22 (SP reach B miss)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving: 10 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 53 (SP Reach B jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving while speaking: 13 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C missed)
Number of scenes where the character's mouth is moving: 6 times Number of scenes where the character's mouth is still: 5 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving while speaking: 8 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: 4 times

(SKY2022-1239) The gaming machine of type 36-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
A first variation pattern for a normal state that notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state,
In both the first variation pattern for normal state and the second variation pattern for normal state, when the character's voice is output, the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is stillly displayed in association with the output of the voice, when the character's voice is output;
When the voice of the character in the first variation pattern for normal state is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice in the second variation pattern for normal state is output.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a character's voice is output, attention can be drawn to the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 22 and 53 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 22 (SP reach B miss)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving: 10 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 53 (SP Reach B jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of a character speaking a line moves: 13 Number of scenes in which the mouth of a character speaking a line remains still: 8 Number of scenes in which the mouth of a character speaking a line moves: Sub-fluctuation pattern 53>Sub-fluctuation pattern 22
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1240) The gaming machine of type 37-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, when the voice of the character is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice of the character,
When the voice of the character in the first variation pattern for the special state is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice in the second variation pattern for the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a character's voice is output, attention can be drawn to the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 77 and 87 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Number of scenes where the character's mouth is moving: 6 times Number of scenes where the character's mouth is still: 5 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of scenes where the mouth of the character speaking is moving: 8 Number of scenes where the mouth of the character speaking is still: 4 Number of scenes where the mouth of the character speaking is moving: Sub-fluctuation pattern 87>Sub-fluctuation pattern 77
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1241) The gaming machine of type 38-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state,
A first variation pattern for a normal state that notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state;
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for normal state and the second variation pattern for normal state, when the character's voice is output, the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is stillly displayed in association with the output of the voice, when the character's voice is output;
the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice when the voice of the character in the first variation pattern for normal state is output is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice when the voice of the character in the second variation pattern for normal state is output,
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, when the voice of the character is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice of the character,
When the voice of the character in the first variation pattern for the special state is output, the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice in the second variation pattern for the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a character's voice is output, attention can be drawn to the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 22, 53, 77, and 87 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 22 (SP reach B miss)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving: 10 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 53 (SP Reach B jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving while speaking: 13 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C missed)
Number of scenes where the character's mouth is moving: 6 times Number of scenes where the character's mouth is still: 5 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of scenes where the mouth of the character who is speaking moves: 8 times Number of scenes where the mouth of the character who is speaking remains still: 4 times Number of scenes where the mouth of the character who is speaking moves: Sub-fluctuation pattern 53>Sub-fluctuation pattern 22
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: Sub-variation pattern 87>Sub-variation pattern 77
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1242) The gaming machine of type 39-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
In a specific change in the normal state, a specific notification effect can be executed that can notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during a period from the start of the specific variation to the execution of the specific notification performance is greater than the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during a period during which the specific notification performance is being executed;
When the voice of the character is output during the period in which the specific notification performance is being executed, the number of times that the mouth of the character is displayed still in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is displayed still in association with the output of the voice when the voice of the character is output during the period in which the specific notification performance is being executed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, during the period from when a specific change begins until a specific notification performance is executed, the character's mouth is displayed statically in association with the output of a character's voice more frequently when the character's voice is output, compared to the period during which the specific notification performance is being executed; and during the period during which the specific notification performance is being executed, the character's mouth is displayed dynamically in association with the output of a character's voice more frequently when the character's voice is output, compared to the period from when a specific change begins until a specific notification performance is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the period during which the specific notification performance is executed and the period from when a specific change begins until a specific notification performance is executed, making it easier to draw attention to the character during the period during which the specific notification performance is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 22 corresponds to the following:
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (6 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (10 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 53 correspond to the corresponding points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (6 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (13 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (0 times)
In addition, as in sub-fluctuation pattern 22 and sub-fluctuation pattern 53, even if the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is moving is 0 during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach, the scope of rights of the form is satisfied. The number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is moving may be 1 or more. In that case, it is sufficient that the number of times does not exceed the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is moving during the SP reach.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1243) The gaming machine of type 40-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the special state, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during the period from the start of the specific variation to the execution of the special notification performance is greater than the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during the period during which the special notification performance is being executed;
when the voice of the character is output during the period in which the special notification performance is being executed, the number of times that the mouth of the character is displayed still in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is displayed still in association with the output of the voice when the voice of the character is output during the period in which the special notification performance is being executed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, during the period from when a specific change begins until a special notification effect is executed, the character's mouth is displayed statically in association with the output of the character's voice more frequently when the character's voice is output, compared to the period during which the special notification effect is being executed; and during the period during which the special notification effect is being executed, the character's mouth is displayed dynamically in association with the output of the character's voice more frequently when the character's voice is output, compared to the period from when a specific change begins until a special notification effect is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the period during which the special notification effect is executed and the period from when a specific change begins until a special notification effect is executed, making it easier to draw attention to the character during the period during which the special notification effect is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 77 corresponds to the following:
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (3 times) > During the SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (5 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (1 time)
In addition, the following relationships in sub-variation pattern 87 correspond to the following points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (3 times) > During SP reach (1 time)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (7 times) > From the start of the fluctuation to the start of SP reach (1 time)
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1244) The gaming machine of type 41-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the normal state, a specific notification effect can be executed that can notify that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during a period from the start of the specific change in the normal state to the execution of the specific notification performance is greater than the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during a period during which the specific notification performance is being executed;
the number of times that the character's mouth is displayed still in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during the period in which the specific notification performance is being executed is greater than the number of times that the character's mouth is displayed still in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during the period in which the specific notification performance is being executed from the start of the specific variation in the normal state to the execution of the specific notification performance;
In a specific change in the special state, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during a period from the start of a specific change in the special state to the execution of the special notification performance is greater than the number of times that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed in association with the output of a voice when the character's voice is output during a period during which the special notification performance is being executed;
when the voice of the character is output during the period in which the special notification performance is being executed, the number of times that the mouth of the character is displayed still in association with the output of the voice is greater than the number of times that the mouth of the character is displayed still in association with the output of the voice when the voice of the character is output during the period in which the special notification performance is being executed from the start of a specific change in the special state to the execution of the special notification performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, during the period from when a specific change begins until a specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed, the character's mouth is displayed statically in association with the output of sound when the character's voice is output more frequently than during the period when the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is being executed; and during the period when a specific notification performance (special notification performance) is being executed, the character's mouth is displayed dynamically in association with the output of sound when the character's voice is output more frequently than during the period when the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed, compared to the period from when a specific change begins until a specific notification performance (special notification performance). This makes it possible to differentiate between the period when a specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed and the period from when a specific change begins until a specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed, making it easier to draw attention to the character during the period when a specific notification performance (special notification performance) is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 22 corresponds to the following:
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (6 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (10 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 53 correspond to the corresponding points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (6 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (13 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 77 correspond to the following points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (3 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (5 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (1 time)
In addition, the following relationships in sub-variation pattern 87 correspond to the following points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (3 times) > During SP reach (1 time)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving: During SP reach (7 times) > From the start of the fluctuation to the start of SP reach (1 time)
In addition, as in sub-fluctuation pattern 22 and sub-fluctuation pattern 53, even if the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is moving is 0 during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach, the scope of rights of the form is satisfied. The number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is moving may be 1 or more. In that case, it is sufficient that the number of times does not exceed the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is moving during the SP reach.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1245) The gaming machine of type 42-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
In a specific variation in a normal state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, diversity is provided by providing cases where audio output is in accordance with the displayed content and cases where audio output is not in accordance with the displayed content, while the number of times audio output is in accordance with the displayed content is greater, thereby increasing the number of times the same information is obtained from both audio and display, thereby heightening interest in the game, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 16 and 47 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 20 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Matching of dialogue and audio: 21 times Mismatching of dialogue and audio: 2 times Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1246) The gaming machine of type 43-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the special state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, diversity is provided by providing cases where audio output is in accordance with the displayed content and cases where audio output is not in accordance with the displayed content, while the number of times audio output is in accordance with the displayed content is greater, thereby increasing the number of times the same information is obtained from both audio and display, thereby heightening interest in the game, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 77 and 87 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 13 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Matching of dialogue and audio: 15 times Mismatching of dialogue and audio: 3 times Corresponding drawings: Figure 205 to Figure 225

(SKY2022-1247) The gaming machine of type 44-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the normal state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed,
In a specific change in the special state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, diversity is provided by providing cases where audio output is in accordance with the displayed content and cases where audio output is not in accordance with the displayed content, while the number of times audio output is in accordance with the displayed content is greater, thereby increasing the number of times the same information is obtained from both audio and display, thereby heightening interest in the game, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 16, 47, 77, and 87 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 20 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Matching of lines and voice: 21 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C missed)
Matching of lines and voice: 13 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Matching of dialogue and audio: 15 times Mismatching of dialogue and audio: 3 times Corresponding drawings: Figure 205 to Figure 225

(SKY2022-1248) The gaming machine of type 45-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
A first variation pattern for a normal state that notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state,
In both the first variation pattern for the normal state and the second variation pattern for the normal state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that an audio is output that is not according to the display content of the subtitle display when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed,
When the audio output in the first variation pattern for normal state and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when the audio output in the second variation pattern for normal state and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, attention can be drawn to the number of times that audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 16 and 47 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 20 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Matching of dialogue and voice: 21 times Mismatching of dialogue and voice: 2 times Matching of dialogue and voice: Sub-variation pattern 47>Sub-variation pattern 16
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1249) The gaming machine of type 46-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed,
When the audio output in the first variation pattern for the special state and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when the audio output in the second variation pattern for the special state and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, attention can be drawn to the number of times that audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship between sub-variation patterns 77 and 87 corresponds to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 13 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Matching of lines and voice: 15 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Matching of lines and voice: Sub-variation pattern 87 > Sub-variation pattern 77
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1250) The gaming machine of type 47-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
A special notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
A first variation pattern for a normal state that notifies the player that the specific notification performance is executed in the normal state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a normal state which notifies the player that the specific notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the specific notification performance in the normal state;
A first variation pattern for a special state that notifies the player that the special notification performance is executed in the special state to be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second variation pattern for a special state which notifies the player that the special notification performance is not controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special notification performance in the special state,
In both the first variation pattern for the normal state and the second variation pattern for the normal state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that an audio is output that is not according to the display content of the subtitle display when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed,
the number of times that the sound is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when the sound output in the first variation pattern for the normal state and the subtitle display corresponding to the sound are displayed is greater than the number of times that the sound is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when the sound output in the second variation pattern for the normal state and the subtitle display corresponding to the sound are displayed;
In both the first variation pattern for the special state and the second variation pattern for the special state, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed,
When the audio output in the first variation pattern for the special state and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when the audio output in the second variation pattern for the special state and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, attention can be drawn to the number of times that audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output, and as a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationships between sub-variation patterns 16, 47, 77, and 87 correspond to each other.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 20 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Matching of lines and voice: 21 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C missed)
Matching of lines and voice: 13 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Matching of lines and voice: 15 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Matching of lines and voice: Sub-variation pattern 47>Sub-variation pattern 16
Match between dialogue and voice: Sub-variation pattern 87>Sub-variation pattern 77
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1251) The gaming machine of type 48-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
In a specific change in the normal state, a specific notification effect can be executed that can notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period from the start of the specific variation in the normal state to the execution of the specific notification performance, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period during which the specific notification performance is being executed,
when displaying the audio output and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio during the period in which the specific notification performance is being performed, the number of times that the audio not conforming to the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that the audio output and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio are output during the period in which the specific notification performance is being performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, during the period from when a specific variation starts until a specific notification performance is executed, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output more frequently than during the period when the specific notification performance is being executed; and during the period when a specific notification performance is being executed, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output more frequently than during the period when the specific notification performance is executed, compared to the period from when a specific variation starts until a specific notification performance is executed. This makes it possible to create a contrast between the period when the specific notification performance is executed and the period from when a specific variation starts until a specific notification performance is executed, making it easier to draw attention to the audio and display content during the period when the specific notification performance is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 16 corresponds to the following:
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach A (11 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (9 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (2 times) > During SP Reach A (0 times)
In addition, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 47 corresponds to the following:
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach A (12 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (9 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach A (2 times) > During SP Reach A (0 times)
In addition, as in the case of sub-variation pattern 16 and sub-variation pattern 47, even if the number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match is 0 during the period of the SP reach, the scope of the rights of the form is satisfied. The number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match may be 1 or more. In that case, it is sufficient that the number does not exceed the number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1252) The gaming machine of type 49-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the special state, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period from the start of a specific change in the special state to the execution of the special notification performance, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period during which the special notification performance is being executed,
When displaying the audio output and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio during the period in which the special notification performance is being performed, the number of times that the audio that is not in accordance with the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that the audio that is not in accordance with the display content of the subtitle display is output during the period from the start of the specific change in the special state to the execution of the specific notification performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, during the period from when a specific variation starts until a special notification effect is executed, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, an audio that does not match the display content of the subtitle display is output more frequently than during the period when the special notification effect is being executed; and during the period when a special notification effect is being executed, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, an audio that matches the display content of the subtitle display is output more frequently than during the period when the special notification effect is being executed, compared to the period from when a specific variation starts until a special notification effect is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the period when a special notification effect is executed and the period from when a specific variation starts until a special notification effect is executed, making it easier to draw attention to the audio and display content during the period when a special notification effect is being executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 77 corresponds to the following:
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach C (10 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach C (3 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach C (3 times) > During SP Reach C (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in sub-variation pattern 87 correspond to the following points.
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach C (12 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach C (3 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach C (3 times) > During SP Reach C (0 times)
In addition, as in the case of sub-variation pattern 77 and sub-variation pattern 87, even if the number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match is 0 during the period of the SP reach, the scope of the rights of the form is satisfied. The number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match may be 1 or more. In that case, it is sufficient that the number does not exceed the number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1253) The gaming machine of type 50-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state are provided,
In a specific change in the normal state, a specific notification effect can be executed that can notify that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period from the start of the specific variation in the normal state to the execution of the specific notification performance, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period during which the specific notification performance is being executed,
when displaying the audio output and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio during the period in which the specific notification performance is being performed, the number of times that the audio that is not in accordance with the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that the audio that is not in accordance with the display content of the subtitle display is output during the period in which the specific notification performance is being performed from the start of the specific fluctuation in the normal state to the execution of the specific notification performance,
In a specific change in the special state, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the advantageous state is being controlled,
when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period from the start of a specific change in the special state to the execution of the special notification performance, the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display is greater than the number of times that the audio is output according to the display content of the subtitle display when displaying an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio during a period during which the special notification performance is being executed,
When displaying the audio output and the subtitle display corresponding to the audio during the period in which the special notification performance is being performed, the number of times that the audio that is not in accordance with the display content of the subtitle display is output is greater than the number of times that the audio that is not in accordance with the display content of the subtitle display is output during the period from the start of the specific change in the special state to the execution of the specific notification performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, during the period from the start of a specific change until the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, an audio that does not conform to the display content of the subtitle display is output more frequently than during the period when the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed; and during the period when a specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed, when an audio output and a subtitle display corresponding to the audio are displayed, an audio that conforms to the display content of the subtitle display is output more frequently than during the period when the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed, compared to the period from the start of a specific change until the specific notification performance (special notification performance). This makes it possible to differentiate between the period when the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed and the period from the start of a specific change until the specific notification performance (special notification performance), making it easier to draw attention to the audio and display content during the period when the specific notification performance (special notification performance) is executed. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character audio output can be provided.
For example, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 16 corresponds to the following:
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach A (11 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (9 times)
Inconsistency between dialogue and voice: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (2 times) > During SP Reach A (0 times)
In addition, the following relationship in sub-variation pattern 47 corresponds to the following:
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach A (12 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (9 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (2 times) > During SP Reach A (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 77 correspond to the following points.
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach C (10 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach C (3 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach C (3 times) > During SP Reach C (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in sub-variation pattern 87 correspond to the following points.
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach C (12 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach C (3 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach C (3 times) > During SP Reach C (0 times)
In addition, like sub-variation pattern 16, sub-variation pattern 47, sub-variation pattern 77, and sub-variation pattern 87, even if the number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match is 0 during the period of the SP reach, the scope of the rights of the form is satisfied. The number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match may be 1 or more. In that case, it is sufficient that the number does not exceed the number of times that the dialogue and the voice do not match during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 205 to 225

(SKY2022-1254) The gaming machine of type 51-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific character that can be displayed both when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and when it is not determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state;
A special character that can be displayed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and that is not displayed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
the specific character is displayed such that, when a voice of the specific character is output, the mouth of the specific character is dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice, and, when a voice of the specific character is output, the mouth of the specific character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice,
the special character is displayed such that, when the voice of the special character is output, the mouth of the special character is not dynamically displayed in association with the output of the voice, and, when the voice of the special character is output, the mouth of the special character is statically displayed in association with the output of the voice;
It is characterized by the following.
According to these features, since the appearance rate of special characters is not high and there is little chance that players will focus on their mouths, they are displayed as still images, while characters used during both winning and losing games are displayed in a mixture of dynamic and still images, thereby attracting the player's attention to specific characters.As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 150, Figure 151, Figure 172, Figure 236, Figure 237

(SKY2022-1255) The gaming machine of type 52-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A launching means is provided which is operated to launch the game medium;
A specific character is depicted on the gaming machine,
When the advantageous state is controlled, a promotion notification can be executed to prompt a player to operate the launching means;
the promotion notification is a notification by a voice of the specific character,
When the promotion notification is executed, a lamp in the vicinity of a location where the specific character is drawn is made to emit light in a specific manner.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when a notification is made to aim to the right, the sound of the character depicted on the gaming machine is output to notify the player that he or she should aim to the right, thereby making the presentation more lively, and the presentation can be made even more lively by lighting up a lamp near the character depicted on the gaming machine.As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 232

(SKY2022-1256) The gaming machine of type 53-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific character is depicted on the gaming machine,
When the vehicle is controlled to be in the advantageous state, a name announcement can be executed to announce a name corresponding to the advantageous state,
the name announcement is an announcement by a voice of the specific character,
When the name announcement is executed, a lamp in the vicinity of the location where the specific character is drawn is made to emit light in a specific manner.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, when announcing the name of a jackpot, the presentation can be made more lively by outputting the sound of the character depicted on the gaming machine, and the presentation can be made even more lively by lighting up a lamp near the character depicted on the gaming machine.As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character sound output can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 233

(SKY2022-1257) The gaming machine of type 54-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific character is depicted on the gaming machine,
A launch promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area is executable;
The launch promotion notification is a notification by a voice of the specific character,
When the launch promotion notification is executed, a lamp in the vicinity of the location where the specific character is drawn is made to emit light in a specific manner.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, the presentation can be made more lively by outputting the voice of a character depicted on the gaming machine when an announcement is made to encourage the launch of a gaming ball toward a specific area, and the presentation can be made even more lively by lighting up a lamp near the character depicted on the gaming machine.As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in terms of character voice output can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 235

(SKY2022-1258) The gaming machine of type 55-1 is,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state.
In a first situation, a sound is output from among a plurality of sounds including a first sound and a second sound, a common display is displayed both when the first sound is output and when the second sound is output, and an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the second sound is output than when the first sound is output;
In a second situation, a display is selected from a plurality of displays including a first display and a second display, a common sound is output both when the first display is displayed and when the second display is displayed, and an expectation of control to the advantageous state is higher when the second display is displayed than when the first display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a feature, there are effects with multiple types of sounds and effects with no types of sounds and different displays, and appropriate notification can be given depending on the effect. As a result, a gaming machine with improvements in the sound output of characters can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 250, Figure 251

All of the above forms were considered as a means to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine with improved character voice output. It is possible to install all forms on a single gaming machine. Each form has an advantageous effect that differs from the other forms, so combining forms can produce new effects or synergistic effects.

(Characters provided on the game board 2 and game machine frame 3)
1, a character decoration 102 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 2. A character decoration 103 is provided in the left area of the game board 2. A character decoration 101 is provided in the upper right area of the game machine frame 3.

(Character Decoration 101)
The character decoration 101 depicts Mumu, the main character of the content of this gaming machine. A character decoration lamp 9g is provided behind the character decoration 101, and when this lamp emits light, the character decoration 101 is illuminated, making it stand out. Note that the character decoration 101 is a non-movable decoration that does not move, but because it protrudes, it plays a role in appealing to players who are not playing the game that this is a gaming machine in which Mumu appears.

(Character Decoration 102)
The character decoration 102 depicts Mumu, the main character of the content of this gaming machine. An attacca lamp 9c is provided behind the character decoration 102, and when this lamp emits light, the character decoration 102 is illuminated, making it stand out.

(Character Decoration 103)
The character decoration 103 depicts Bakuchu, an enemy character in the content of this gaming machine. A decorative lamp 9f is provided behind the character decoration 103, and when this lamp emits light, the character decoration 103 is illuminated, making it stand out.

(Main fluctuation pattern, sub fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram for explaining a low-based main fluctuation pattern. The main fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation pattern setting process described in FIG. 34 as described above. In this embodiment, there are 37 types of low-based main fluctuation patterns. FIG. 12-3 is a diagram for explaining a low-based sub-fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, there are 70 types of low-based sub-fluctuation patterns. As described above, the sub-fluctuation pattern is determined in the variable display start setting process described in FIG. 44. The sub-fluctuation pattern is prepared to deliver a variety of fluctuation patterns to the player by preparing a large number of fluctuation patterns on the side of the large-capacity performance control means instead of the game control means with a small capacity. Here, the determination of the sub-fluctuation pattern will be explained using an example. When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 30 described in FIG. 12-1 is determined, the game control means notifies the performance control means that the main fluctuation number 30 has been determined by transmitting a fluctuation pattern designation. The performance control means that receives the fluctuation pattern designation determines which sub-fluctuation pattern to select. When the main fluctuation number 30 is determined, the sub-fluctuation patterns that may be determined by lottery are four types, 49 to 52, and are four types with different combinations of various effects, such as whether to execute a conversation effect, a step-up effect, or whether to execute an effect before executing SP Reach A (continuous hit chance, jam training). The effect control means determines the sub-fluctuation pattern by a predetermined lottery table. Figure 12-2 is a diagram for explaining a high-base main fluctuation pattern. Figure 12-4 is a diagram for explaining a high-base sub-fluctuation pattern.

(Example of a performance executed on a low base)
101 to 143 are diagrams for explaining examples of performances executed at a low base. The mechanism of the diagram will be explained using FIG. 101. FIG. 101 (1-1) shows the situation of 1 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. After that, the situation changes to FIG. 101 (1-2). The arrow between FIG. 101 (1-1) and FIG. 101 (1-2) indicates that the situation changes to the next situation over time. The arrow below FIG. 101 (1-8) has a character such as (1-9) written on it, not the situation of 1 on the liquid crystal display device 5. In this case, it indicates that the situation will move to the situation of 1 on the liquid crystal display device 5 written in another diagram. In this example, the next situation of FIG. 101 (1-8) is FIG. 102 (1-9).

(Example 1 of fluctuations at low base)
101 to 105 are diagrams for explaining the variations that can be executed when any of the main variation patterns 11 to 18, 29 to 34 is selected and any of the sub variation patterns 12, 14, 16, 18, 19, 22, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 47, 49, 50, 53, 55, 56, 59, 61, 62 is selected at a low base, and the pseudo variations are performed three times until a reach is reached. In this variation, it is decided by lottery on the sub side that a conversation performance will be executed as a performance during the variation.

(Example 2 of fluctuations at low base)
106 to 110 are diagrams for explaining the variations that can be executed when any one of the main variation patterns 11 to 18, 29 to 34 is selected and any one of the sub variation patterns 13, 15, 17, 20, 21, 23, 26, 27, 29, 32, 33, 48, 51, 52, 54, 57, 58, 60, 63, 64 is selected at a low base, and the pseudo variation is performed three times until it becomes a reach. In this variation, it is decided by the lottery on the sub side that a step-up performance will be executed as a performance during the variation.

(Chance to hit repeatedly)
111 and 112 are diagrams for explaining the effects that are executed when any of the main fluctuation patterns 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18-23, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34-37 is selected and any of the sub fluctuation patterns 7, 9, 11, 14, 15, 18, 20, 24, 26, 30, 32, 34-36, 38, 40, 44, 46, 49, 51, 55, 57, 61, 63, 65, 67, and 69 is selected in a low base. The consecutive shot chance is an effect that is executed after the reach is reached and before the SP reach is executed, and the effect content is to encourage the player to operate the button and to raise the meter. When it develops into any of the SP reaches, the meter becomes MAX, and when it does not develop into the SP reach, the meter does not become MAX.

(Jam training)
113 to 115 are diagrams for explaining the effects that are executed when any of the main fluctuation patterns 14, 16, 18, 21, 23, 30, 32, 34 to 37 is selected and any of the sub fluctuation patterns 19, 21, 25, 27, 31, 33, 37, 39, 41, 50, 52, 56, 58, 62, 64, 66, 68, 70 is selected at a low base. Jam's training is an effect in which the jam is trained, and finally, the training is completed, and the training develops into one of the SP reaches. If the training does not develop into an SP reach, the jam's training is not selected, so there is no failure. The jam's training can be modified as follows. In this example, a pattern in which the training continues twice and develops into an SP reach or a story reach is illustrated as an example, but there may be a pattern in which the training develops without continuing or a pattern in which the training develops for a number of times other than two.

(SP Reach A)
116 to 123 are diagrams for explaining the flow of SP Reach A. SP Reach A is an SP Reach in which Mumu and Bakuchu battle, and in the case of a jackpot, Mumu wins, and in the case of a miss, Bakuchu wins and Mumu loses. FIGS. 116 to 120 are common parts that are executed in both the case of a jackpot and a miss (also called the introduction part). FIGS. 121 and 122 are parts that are executed in the case of a jackpot and are not executed in the case of a miss, and in the case of a jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, in addition to Mumu winning, the player is notified of the jackpot by the falling of the role object and the display of three decorative symbols. FIG. 123 is executed in the event of a miss, and Bakuchu wins (Mumu loses), and the decorative symbols are displayed in an unmatched state (such as 212), thereby informing the player that it is a miss.

(SP Reach B)
124 to 133 are diagrams for explaining the flow of SP Reach B. SP Reach B is an SP Reach in which Mumu and Dark Nana battle, and in the case of a jackpot, Mumu wins, and in the case of a miss, Dark Nana wins and Mumu loses. FIGS. 123 to 129 are common parts that are executed in both the case of a jackpot and a miss (also called the introduction part). FIGS. 130 to 132 are parts that are executed in the case of a jackpot and are not executed in the case of a miss, and in the case of a jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 130 to 132, Mumu wins and three decorative symbols are displayed to inform the player that there is a jackpot. FIG. 133 is executed in the case of a miss, and in addition to Dark Nana winning (Mumu losing), the decorative symbols are displayed in a non-matching mode (such as mode 212) to inform the player that there is a miss.

(Story Reach)
Figs. 134 to 143 are diagrams for explaining the flow of a story reach. A story reach is a reach that depicts the daily life of Mumu and Jam, in which Mumu invites Jam to lunch. If it is a jackpot, Jam accepts Mumu's invitation and goes to lunch together, and if it is a loss, Jam declines Mumu's invitation. Figs. 134 to 138 are common parts that are executed in both cases of a jackpot and a loss (also called the introduction part). Figs. 139 to 141 are parts that are executed in the case of a jackpot and are not executed in the case of a loss. In the case of a jackpot, as shown in Figs. 139 to 141, in addition to Jam accepting the invitation, the falling of the role and the display of three matching decorative patterns notify the player that it is a jackpot. Figures 142 and 143 are executed when the winning combination is a miss, and the player is notified that the combination is a miss by displaying Jam declining the invitation, Mumu looking disappointed, and the decorative symbols not matching (such as 212).

(Fanfare period)
144 to 146 are diagrams for explaining the fanfare period. The fanfare period is the period after the symbol determination period ends and before the big win round starts. The fanfare period is a period provided to prevent the big win round from starting immediately, and serves to make the player realize again that he or she has won a big win, and to make the player realize that he or she should operate the handle to aim at the area on the right side of the board during the big win round.

(During the jackpot round)
147 is a diagram for explaining the big win round. During the big win round, a "Aim for V" effect is executed to encourage the player to aim at a specific area provided in the big win opening.

(Example 1 of fluctuations on a high base)
148 and 149 are diagrams for explaining the variations that can be executed when any one of the main variation patterns 42 to 51 is selected and any one of the sub variation patterns 75, 77, 79, 81, 83, 85, 87, 89, 91, and 93 is selected at a high base, and the variations until a reach is reached. In this variation, it is decided by lottery on the sub side that a conversation performance will be executed as a performance during the variation.

(Example 2 of fluctuations at high base)
150 and 151 are diagrams for explaining the variations that can be executed when any one of the main variation patterns 42 to 51 is selected and any one of the sub variation patterns 76, 78, 80, 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92, and 94 is selected at a high base, and the variations until a reach is reached. In this variation, it is determined by lottery on the sub side that a button step-up performance is executed as a performance during the variation.

(Chance to hit repeatedly)
152 and 153 are diagrams for explaining the effects that are executed when any one of the main fluctuation patterns 42, 44, 46, 49, and 51 is selected and any one of the sub fluctuation patterns 75, 76, 79, 80, 83, 84, 89, 90, 93, and 94 is selected in a high base. The consecutive hit chance is an effect that encourages the player to operate the button and increases the meter. If it develops into any of the SP reaches, the meter will be MAX, and if it does not develop into the SP reach, the meter will not be MAX.

(SP Reach C)
154 to 159 are diagrams for explaining the flow of SP Reach C. SP Reach C is an SP Reach in which Mumu and Boingo battle, and in the case of a jackpot, Mumu wins, and in the case of a miss, Boingo wins and Mumu loses. Figs. 154 to 156 are common parts that are executed in both the case of a jackpot and a miss (also called the introduction part). Figs. 157 and 158 are parts that are executed in the case of a jackpot and are not executed in the case of a miss, and in the case of a jackpot, as shown in Figs. 157 and 158, in addition to Mumu winning, the player is notified of the jackpot by the display of Boingo flying away as a star, the falling of the role object, and the display of three decorative symbols. FIG. 159 is executed in the event of a loss, and in addition to Boingo winning (Mumu losing), the decorative symbols are displayed in an unmatched state (such as 212), thereby informing the player that it is a loss.

(SP Reach D)
160 to 165 are diagrams for explaining the flow of SP Reach D. SP Reach D is an SP Reach where Mumu and Bakuchu battle, and in the case of a jackpot, Mumu wins, and in the case of a miss, Bakuchu wins and Mumu loses. FIGS. 160 to 162 are common parts that are executed in both the case of a jackpot and a miss (also called the introduction part). FIGS. 163 and 164 are parts that are executed in the case of a jackpot and are not executed in the case of a miss, and in the case of a jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, in addition to Mumu winning, Bakuchu is displayed flying as a star, a role falls, and a set of three decorative symbols is displayed to inform the player that a jackpot has been won. 165 is executed in the case of a miss, and Bakuchu wins (Mumu loses), and the decorative symbols are not aligned (such as 212), thereby informing the player that it is a miss. SP Reach B and SP Reach D are both SP reaches in which Mumu and Bakuchu battle, but the way the battle unfolds is presented is different for each.

(Fanfare period)
166 to 170 are diagrams for explaining the fanfare period. The fanfare period is the period after the symbol determination period ends and before the big win round starts. The fanfare period is a period provided to prevent the big win round from starting immediately, and serves to make the player realize again that he or she has won a big win, and to make the player realize that he or she should operate the handle to aim at the area on the right side of the board during the big win round.

(During the jackpot round)
171 is a diagram for explaining the big win round. During the big win round, a "Aim for V" effect is executed to encourage the player to aim at a specific area provided in the big win opening.

(Explanation of the characters)
FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining characters that appear in the presentation of this gaming machine. The friendly characters who are in a position to inform the player of advantageous developments, such as announcing a big win if the player wins a battle, include Mumu, Jam, Nana, Moetarou, and Rimu. The enemy characters who are in a position to inform the player of disadvantageous developments, such as announcing a loss if the player wins a battle, include Boingo, Bakuchu, and Dark Nana. Mumu, Jam, Nana, Moetarou, Rimu, Boingo, and Bakuchu are each voiced by a different person (voice actor, etc.), and the voice is output in a tone of voice that represents the worldview of the character. Dark Nana is the transformed form of Nana who accepts the invitation of Boingo or Bakuchu and becomes an enemy character as part of the story in the content of this gaming machine. Here, the voices of Dark Nana and Nana will be explained. The same voice actor is in charge of the voices of Nana and Dark Nana. However, as mentioned above, because Nana plays an ally and Dark Nana plays an enemy, the voice actors use different tones for Nana and Dark Nana to express the worldviews of each character. In the aforementioned SP Reach B, Nana and Dark Nana appear, and as mentioned above, the same voice actor outputs the voices of Nana and Dark Nana using different tones, so SP Reach B can also be said to be a reach in which the same voice actor is in charge of the voices of multiple characters.

From here on, we will explain in detail how the characters' dialogue sounds are output in each situation. The numbers in parentheses in the upper left corner of each display situation on the liquid crystal display device 5 in Figures 101 to 171 and the numbers in parentheses in the figures described below are written with the same numbers if they indicate the same display situation. If there is a display situation not shown in Figures 101 to 171, a different number is added to the number in parentheses.

(Example 1 of fluctuations at low base level: dialogue sound details)
173 and 174 are diagrams for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds output in the above-mentioned variation example 1 (FIGS. 101 to 105) in the low base. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in the variation example 1 in the low base are managed by symbols such as S-1-O (the numbers in the O are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-1-1) ("What would look good on me?")
(1-3) to (1-6) are scenes in which a conversation preview is executed after the change has started. As in (1-3) and (1-4), the frame in which the words and characters of the conversation are displayed rotates and expands. As in (1-5), the frame is placed in a fixed position and the contents of the conversation become visible. As in (1-6), a line sound such as "What would suit me?" is output in Mumu's voice. The text display is displayed in the same way as the lines sound. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display. As in (1-5) and (1-6), Mumu's mouth does not move and remains open.

(S-1-2) (“REACH”)
(1-8) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state. As shown in (1-8), the word "REACH" is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in the reach state, and the The voice will say "REACH." The voice will be output exactly as the text appears. This is a scene where the voice of Mumu is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-1-3) ("We're not going anywhere!")
(1-9) to (1-11) are scenes in which it is announced that a pseudo consecutive occurrence will occur. As in (1-9) and (1-10), the pseudo consecutive pattern with NEXT drawn stops in the middle, informing the player that a pseudo second variation will occur. As in (1-11), the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed with a display of ×2, indicating that a pseudo second variation (also called a re-variation) will occur, and a voice of Mumu saying "We're not going to stop yet" is output. Although the text display is ×2, the voice is not output as "Multiply 2", but as "We're not going to stop yet". This is a voice that does not match the text display. Also, (1-11) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-1-4) (S-1-5) ("What would look good on me?""A suit would look good on me!")
(1-13) to (1-18) are scenes in which a conversation preview is executed after the re-change has started. As in (1-13) and (1-14), the frame in which the conversation text and characters are displayed rotates and expands. As in (1-15), the frame is positioned at a fixed position, the content of the conversation becomes visible, and Mumu's voice is output, saying, "What would look good on me?". The text display is displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of the display. As in (1-15) and (1-16), Mumu's mouth does not move and remains open. This conversation preview of Mumu is the same as before the re-change. As in (1-17) and (1-18), a frame enters from the left side of the display area, and Jam's voice is output, saying, "That suit looks good on you!". The text display is displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The character display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing its size or position from the beginning to the end of the display. As shown in (1-18), the mouth of the jam does not move and remains open.

(S-1-6) (“REACH”)
(1-20) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state. As in (1-20), the word "REACH" is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in the reach state, and the The voice will say "REACH." The voice will be output exactly as the text appears. This is a scene where the voice of Mumu is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-1-7) ("We're not going anywhere!")
(1-21) to (1-23) are scenes in which it is announced that a pseudo consecutive occurrence will occur. As in (1-21) and (1-22), the pseudo consecutive pattern with NEXT drawn stops in the middle, informing the player that a pseudo third variation will occur. As in (1-23), the pseudo consecutive pattern display shows a display of ×3, indicating that a pseudo third variation (also called a re-variation) will occur, and a voice of Mumu saying "We're not going to stop yet" is output. Although the text display shows ×3, the voice does not say "Multiply 3", but rather "We're not going to stop yet". This is a voice that does not match the text display. Also, (1-23) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-1-8) (S-1-9) (S-1-10) ("What suits me?""Suits look good on me!""Thank you! I'll keep wearing them!")
(1-25) to (1-33) are scenes in which a conversation preview is executed after the re-fluctuation has started. As in (1-25) and (1-26), the frame in which the conversation text and characters are displayed rotates and expands. As in (1-27), the frame is positioned at a fixed position, the contents of the conversation become visible, and a line sound such as "What would look good on me?" is output in Mumu's voice. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start of display to the end of display. As in (1-27) and (1-28), Mumu's mouth does not move and remains open. As in (1-29) and (1-30), a frame enters from the left side of the display area, and a line sound such as "That suit looks good on you!" is output in Jam's voice. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start of display to the end of display. As shown in (1-30), Jam's mouth does not move and remains open. As shown in (1-31), the displayed frame slides up, and as shown in (1-32) and (1-33), a frame frames in from the left side of the display area, and Mumu's voice outputs a line such as, "Thank you! I'll wear it again!" The text is displayed exactly as it sounds. The text display remains stationary without changing size or position from the start to the end of the display. As shown in (1-33), Mumu's mouth does not move and remains open.

(S-1-11) (“REACH”)
(1-35) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state. As in (1-35), the word "REACH" is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in the reach state, and the The voice will say "REACH." The voice will be output exactly as the text appears. This is a scene where the voice of Mumu is output without the display of Mumu.

(Example 2 of low-base fluctuations: dialogue details)
175 and 176 are diagrams for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds output in the above-mentioned variation example 2 (FIGS. 106 to 110) in the low base. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in the variation example 2 in the low base are managed by symbols such as S-2-O (the numbers in the circle are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-2-1) ("This is your chance!")
(2-4) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state. As in (2-4), the word "REACH" is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in a reach state, and a voice of Mumu is output saying something like "It's your chance!". A voice with content different from the displayed text is output. This is a scene where the voice of Mumu is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-2-2) ("We're not going anywhere yet.")
(2-5) to (2-7) are scenes in which it is announced that a pseudo consecutive occurrence will occur. As in (2-5) and (2-6), the pseudo consecutive pattern with NEXT drawn stops in the middle, informing the player that a pseudo second variation will occur. As in (2-7), the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed with a display of ×2, indicating that a pseudo second variation (also called a re-variation) will occur, and a voice of Mumu saying "We're not going to stop yet" is output. Although the text display is ×2, the voice is not output as "2 times", but as "We're not going to stop yet". This is a voice that does not match the text display. Also, (2-7) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-2-3) ("I have to work hard to help everyone.")
(2-9) to (2-16) are scenes in which the step-up announcement is executed. As in (2-9) to (2-13), the step-up is performed by rotating a three-dimensional display. When the step-up is completed as in (2-13), the display expands. As in (2-14) to (2-16), Nana's voice outputs a line such as "I have to work hard to be of strength to everyone, too." The text is displayed in accordance with the line. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of the display. As in (2-14) to (2-16), Nana's mouth alternates between opening and closing.

(S-2-4) ("This is your chance!")
(2-18) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state. As in (2-18), the word "REACH" is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in a reach state, and a voice of Mumu is output saying something like "It's your chance!". A voice with content different from the displayed text is output. This is a scene where the voice of Mumu is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-2-5) ("This is our chance!")
(2-19) to (2-21) are scenes in which it is announced that a pseudo consecutive occurrence will occur. As in (2-19) and (2-20), the pseudo consecutive pattern with NEXT drawn stops in the middle, informing the player that a pseudo third variation will occur. As in (2-21), the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed with a display of ×3, indicating that a pseudo third variation (also called a re-variation) will occur, and a voice of Mumu saying "It's your chance!" is output. Although the text display is ×3, the voice is not output as "Multiply 3", but as "It's your chance!" This is a voice that does not match the text display. Also, (2-21) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output without the display of Mumu.

(S-2-6) (S-2-7) ("This is the cave...""We have to hurry!")
Scenes (2-23) to (2-33) are scenes in which the step-up notice is executed. As in (2-23) to (2-29), the step-up is performed by rotating a three-dimensional display. When the step-up is completed as in (2-29), the display is enlarged. As in (2-30) and (2-31), Jam's voice outputs a line such as "This is that cave...". The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start of display to the end of display. As in (2-30) and (2-31), Nana's mouth alternates between opening and closing. Furthermore, as in (2-32) and (2-33), Jam's voice outputs a line such as "We have to hurry!". The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start of display to the end of display. As shown in (2-32) and (2-33), Nana's mouth alternates between opening and closing.

(S-2-8) ("It's hot.")
(2-35) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state. As in (2-35), the word "REACH" is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in a reach state, and a voice of Mumu saying "It's hot" is output. A voice with content different from the displayed text is output. This is a scene where the voice of Mumu is output without the display of Mumu.

(Details of the dialogue for the Repeated Hit Chance)
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds that are output during the aforementioned consecutive tap chance (FIGS. 111 and 112). Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used during the consecutive tap chance are managed by symbols such as S-10-O (the numbers inside the O are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-10-1) ("Press the button to fill up the meter.")
(10-1) is a scene where the title of a performance such as a chance to hit repeatedly is announced. As in (10-1), the line "Press the button to fill the meter" is output by a voice narration. The text display is "chance to hit repeatedly" and "press the button to fill the meter", and the text display and the voice output do not match. This is because the text display is displayed in accordance with the worldview of the game machine (in this case, the mission of strengthening Mumu is imposed, so the display is in the imperative form) to make the player more engrossed in the game, while the voice output is output in a polite form rather than an imperative form, since some players may be dissatisfied if the voice output is in the imperative form. In addition, since the main text display "chance to hit repeatedly" is displayed larger, the auxiliary display "press the button to fill the meter" may not be noticed, so the "chance to hit repeatedly" is not read out, and instead, a polite version of "press the button to fill the meter" is output, "press the button to fill the meter".

((S-10-2) “READY”)
(10-2) is a scene where the player is prompted to prepare for button presses. As in (10-2), the narrator outputs the line "READY." The text display and the audio output match. Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed but her voice is not heard.

(S-10-3) ("Push--")
(10-3) is the scene where the button press begins. In (10-3), the line "Push it" is output as a narration voice. The text display is "GO!", but the voice output is "Push it", so the text display and the voice output do not match. This is because the voice is designed to output the action the player should now take, in order to be more direct than "GO!". Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed, but no voice output for Mumu is made.

(S-10-4) (“MAX”)
(10-11) is a scene where the player is informed of the success of the button press. As in (10-11), the narrator outputs the line "MAX." The text display and audio output are It matches. Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed but the sound of Mumu is not output.

(S-10-5) ("Disappointing")
(10-7) is a scene where the failure is announced as a result of repeatedly pressing the button. As in (10-7), the line "Too bad" is output as a voice narration. This is a scene where no text is displayed. Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed but the voice of Mumu is not output.

(SP Reach A dialogue sound details)
Figures 178 to 181 are diagrams for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds that are output in the above-mentioned SP Reach A (Figures 116 to 123). Details are given below for each dialogue sound. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in SP Reach A are managed by symbols such as S-A 0 (the numbers inside the 0 are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-A1) ("Stop doing evil! Bakuchu!")
(A-1) is a scene showing the ground before Mumu appears. (A-2) to (A-7) are scenes in which Mumu appears. In scene (A-2), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Stop your evil deeds! Bakuchu!" is output in Mumu's voice. Dialogue subtitles are displayed according to the dialogue sounds. Dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display. The display progresses from a state in which Mumu's face is not displayed as in (A-2) to a state in which Mumu's face is displayed as in (A-3). Mumu's mouth alternates between opening and closing as in (A-3) to (A-7). As shown in (A-7), Mumu's mouth is open before the scene switches to (A-8). This is because, since the final line, such as "bakuchu," is a line that ends with the mouth open when actually spoken, the open mouth is designed to be displayed before the switch in order to achieve realism.

(S-A2) ("Mumu vs Bakuchu!")
(A-8) to (A-19) are scenes in which the reach title of SP Reach A is displayed. In order to give the impression of switching scenes from the display of (A-7), the background is blacked out and the title display begins. In (A-8) to (A-10), a display such as "Mumu" is displayed while expanding and then frames out. At this time, the sound "Mumu" is not output. In (A-11) to (A-13), a display such as "VS" is displayed while expanding and then frames out. At this time, the sound "VS" is not output. In (A-14) to (A-16), a display such as "Bakuchu" is displayed while expanding and then frames out. At this time, the sound "Bakuchu" is not output. In (A-17) to (A-19), the characters "Mumu,""VS," and "Bakuchu," which have been displayed in stages up until now, are combined to be displayed in a completed form as the title. As shown in (A-17), no characters are displayed at first, and a light effect is displayed, and then as shown in (A-18), the display is reduced from an expanded state, and as shown in (A-19), the display is at a fixed size and fixed position so that the player can easily view the entire title. In this way, in the title display of SP Reach A, the characters constituting the title display are displayed in stages, and the characters displayed in stages are started to be displayed at a size different from the size (fixed size) that will be displayed at the end, and while changing the size, the characters displayed in stages are finally united and displayed at the fixed size. Also, the characters displayed in stages are started to be displayed at a position different from the position (fixed position) that will be displayed at the end, and while changing the position, the characters displayed in stages are finally united and displayed at the fixed position. As described above, for the character displays of (A-8) to (A-10), (A-11) to (A-13), and (A-14) to (A-16), no sound corresponding to the characters is output, but instead, sound effects are output. In this example, a sound effect such as "thud" corresponding to the enlargement of the text display is output in each scene. In (A-17) to (A-19), a sound effect such as "beep" corresponding to the title display is output. In (A-19), a narration voice such as "Mumu VS (VS) Bakuchu" corresponding to the text display is output. At this time, the sound effect such as "beep" continues to be output, but is output louder so that the narration voice has priority.

(S-A3) ("Shut up! Take this!")
(A-20) to (A-22) are scenes in which Bakuchu attacks Mumu. In scene (A-20), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the lines "Shut up! Take this!" are output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (A-20) to (A-22).

(S-A4) ("Whoaaaa!")
(A-23) is a scene in which Mumu is attacked by Bakuchu. In scene (A-23), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Whoaaaa!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in line with the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens as in (A-23).

(Mouth movements when multiple characters are displayed)
In the scenes (A-20) to (A-23), multiple characters such as Mumu and Bakuchu are displayed. As mentioned above, Bakuchu speaks in the scenes (A-20) to (A-22), and Mumu speaks in the scene (A-23). In each scene, the character who speaks basically opens their mouth, and closes their mouth depending on the content of the line. Here, if you focus on the character who is not speaking (Mumu in the scenes (A-20) to (A-22), and Bakuchu in (A-23)), the character who is not speaking has their mouth closed. In this way, it is easy to understand which character is speaking, and the player can be more immersed in the world of SP Reach.

(S-A5) ("I won't forgive you anymore!!!")
(A-24) to (A-26) are scenes before Mumu, who has been attacked by Bakuchu, fights back against Bakuchu. In scene (A-24), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I won't forgive you anymore!!!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a static manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (A-24) to (A-26).

(S-A6) ("Ultimate Punch!")
(A-27) to (A-29) are scenes in which Mumu counterattacks Bakuchu. In scene (A-27), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Ultimate punch!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (A-27) to (A-29).

(S-A7) ("That punch won't work on me!")
(A-30) to (A-33) are scenes in which Bakuchu prepares to block Mumu's attack. In scene (A-30), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "That punch won't work on me!" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as shown in (A-30) to (A-33). Focusing on (A-33), a decorative pattern is displayed in scene (A-33). This decorative pattern is displayed transparently, allowing Bakuchu's figure behind it to be seen. By doing this, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the change, such as Bakuchu's mouth being open in (A-32) and then closing in (A-33), and it becomes easy to understand even when a change in display occurs, such as the display of a decorative pattern indicating that Bakuchu is speaking.

(S-A8) ("Woooohooo!!!")
(A-34) and (A-35) are scenes in which Bakuchu tries to block Mumu's attack. In scene (A-34), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the dialogue "Woooooooo!!!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Here, Bakuchu is displayed using most of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and although Mumu's hands are displayed, they take up less display area than Bakuchu's. Bakuchu's mouth is displayed closed so that it is not mistaken for Bakuchu saying the line "Woooooooo!!!".

(S-A9) ("I can do it!")
(A-36) is a scene in which a cut-in of Mumu is displayed. In scene (A-36), dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I can do it" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sound. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. (A-37) is the scene after the cut-in display has ended.

(S-A10) ("Push")
(A-38) and (A-39) are scenes in which a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As in (A-38), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed shrinking from an enlarged state. As in (A-39), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed at a fixed size and at a fixed position, and the line "Press" is output in the voice of Mumu. In this way, the text display "Press" starts out at a size different from the size that will ultimately be displayed (fixed size), and is displayed at the fixed size while changing the size. Also, the text display "Press" starts out at a position different from the position that will ultimately be displayed (fixed position), and is displayed at the fixed position while changing the position.

(Moving character scenes, no dialogue)
(A-40) to (A-42) are scenes in which the role objects are movable. In these scenes, no dialogue sounds are output from any of the characters.

(S-A11) (Remember that)
(A-43) is a scene in which Bakuchu is attacked by Mumu. In the scene (A-43), a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle is displayed. Here, the line "Remember that" is output in the voice of Bakuchu. The dialogue subtitle is displayed in accordance with the dialogue sound. The dialogue subtitle is displayed in a stationary manner without changing its size or position from the start to the end of its display. Focusing on (A-43), a broken decorative pattern is displayed in the scene (A-43). This broken decorative pattern is a transparent display, and Bakuchu's figure behind it can be seen. By doing so, it is possible for the player to visually confirm that Bakuchu has its mouth open, making it easier to understand that Bakuchu is speaking.

(S-A12) (Yay! I'll protect everyone!)
(A-44) to (A-46) are scenes in which Mumu wins the battle against Bakuchu and utters her catchphrase. In scene (A-44), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Yay! I'll protect everyone!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (A-44) to (A-46).

(Pattern display, pattern confirmation, no dialogue)
(A-47) to (A-55) are scenes where three sets of decorative symbols are displayed and the decorative symbols stop. As in (A-47), the subtitles of Mumu's catchphrase (Yay! I'll protect everyone!) that were displayed up to (A-46) disappear, and the background changes to display three sets of decorative symbols. As can be seen in (A-47), Mumu is still with her mouth open before the background is changed to make it easier to understand that she is speaking. In (A-49) to (A-52), the three sets of decorative symbols are enlarged and then displayed in their normal positions. In (A-53), "Completely settled" is displayed again, which means that Mumu has won against Bakuchu, but no sound is output at this time. Because the background has changed from the battle scene, the words "Completely settled" are not spoken, allowing the player to bask in the silence and celebration. As shown in (A-54), the background returns to the state before the SP Reach was executed, and "222" and the decorative symbols are displayed in a line, and as shown in (A-55), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, ending the flow of the SP Reach.

(S-A13) (It doesn't listen!)
(A-56) to (A-58) are scenes in which Bakuchu blocks Mumu's attack. In scene (A-56), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. In this case, the line "You won't listen!" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (A-56) to (A-58).

(Design confirmed, no dialogue)
(A-59) to (A-62) are scenes where a loss is notified by a decorative symbol and scenes where the decorative symbols stop. As in (A-60), the decorative symbol "1" is displayed, as in (A-61), the decorative symbols are displayed in a state where the decorative symbols are not aligned, such as "212", and as in (A-62), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the series of SP reach flows ends.

(SP Reach A Summary)
So far I have explained about SP Reach A,

(SP Reach B dialogue sound details)
Figures 182 to 186 are diagrams for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds that are output in the above-mentioned SP Reach B (Figures 124 to 133). Details are given below for each dialogue sound. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in SP Reach B are managed by symbols such as S-B 0 (the numbers inside the 0 are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-B1, S-B2) ("The Final Battle", "Mumu vs. Nana")
(B-1) and (B-2) are scenes in which Dark Nana appears. (B-3) to (B-10) are scenes in which the title of SP Reach B, "Battle Mumu vs. Nana," is announced. As in (B-3), a whiteout display is displayed. As in (B-4), "Battle" is displayed enlarged, and then as in (B-5), it becomes a fixed size and is positioned at a fixed position, and the line "Battle" is output by a narration voice. The text is displayed exactly as it sounds. As in (B-6) and (B-7), Mumu and Dark Nana are displayed against the background of the text "Battle." As in (B-8), an effect display is displayed and an enlarged "Mumu vs. Nana" is displayed, and then as in (B-9), it becomes a fixed size and is positioned at a fixed position, and when the effect display is cleared (display has ended), the line "Mumu vs. Nana" is output by a narration voice. The words are displayed exactly as they are spoken. As in (B-10), the display of "Mumu VS Nana" fades out, and as in (B-11), a scene appears in which Mumu and Dark Nana confront each other.

(S-B3) ("We have to bring Nana back to her senses!")
(B-12) to (B-14) are scenes in which Mumu calls out to Dark Nana. In scene (B-12), dialogue subtitles are displayed along with the sound of the dialogue being output. Here, the line "We have to bring Nana back to her senses!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the sound of the dialogue is output. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a static manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-12) to (B-14).

(S-B4) ("Nana! It's me! It's me!")
(B-15) to (B-17) are scenes in which Mumu calls out to Dark Nana. In scene (B-15), the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the lines "Nana! It's me! It's Mumu!" are output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sound is heard. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-15) to (B-17).

(S-B5) ("Hmm... I don't know...")
(B-18) to (B-20) are scenes in which Dark Nana speaks lines. In scene (B-18), the sound of the lines is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the lines "Hmm... I don't know... that guy" are output in Dark Nana's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the lines. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Dark Nana's mouth opens and closes as shown in (B-18) to (B-20).

(S-B6) ("I'm sorry... I'm not going to let you go")
(B-21) to (B-23) are scenes in which Dark Nana speaks lines. In scene (B-21), the sound of the lines is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the lines "I... won't... give up..." are output in Dark Nana's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the lines. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Dark Nana's mouth opens and closes as in (B-21) to (B-23).

(S-B7) ("This is the end.")
(B-24) to (B-27) are scenes in which Dark Nana speaks lines. In scene (B-25), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "This is it.... it's over" is output in Dark Nana's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Dark Nana's mouth opens and closes as in (B-25) to (B-27).

(S-B8) ("Mugen Bakushinsho")
(B-28) is a scene where Dark Nana is about to use her special move. In the (B-28) scene, the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. " is output in Dark Nana's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as they sound. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a static manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display. In (B-28), Dark Nana's mouth remains open and does not open or close. This is a scene where the character stands out, such as a special move, and is likely to attract the player's attention. Therefore, in order to prevent the character's coolness or cuteness from being lost by moving its mouth, the mouth is deliberately not moved. In this scene, the image is displayed in an unrealistic way.

(S-B9) ("I won't lose!")
(B-29) to (B-31) are scenes in which Mumu speaks lines. In scene (B-29), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I won't lose!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-29) to (B-31).

(S-B10) ("Absolutely... absolutely...")
(B-32) to (B-35) are scenes in which Mumu speaks lines. In scene (B-32), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Absolutely... absolutely..." is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the sound of the line sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-32) to (B-35).

(S-B11) ("I'm going to bring Nana home!!")
(B-36) to (B-38) are scenes in which Mumu speaks lines. In scene (B-36), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I'm going to take Nana home!!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the sound of the line sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-36) to (B-38).

(S-B12) ("This is the end, Nana!")
(B-40) to (B-42) are scenes in which Mumu speaks lines. In scene (B-40), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "This is the last time, Nana!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-40) to (B-42).

(S-B13) ("Delta Break")
(B-43) is a scene in which Mumu is about to use her special move. In the scene (B-43), a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle is displayed. Here, the line "Delta Break" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitle is displayed in the same way as the dialogue sound. The dialogue subtitle is displayed in a stationary manner without changing its size or position from the start to the end of its display. As shown in (B-43), Mumu's mouth remains open and does not open or close. This is because this is a scene in which the character stands out as a special move and is likely to attract the player's attention, so the mouth is not moved on purpose to prevent the character's coolness or cuteness from being lost by moving the mouth. Normally, opening and closing the mouth would be realistic, but in this scene, it is displayed in an unrealistic manner.

(S-B14) ("Nanaaaa!")
(B-46) to (B-48) are scenes in which Mumu calls out to Nana. In scene (B-46), the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Nanaaaaah!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sound. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-46) to (B-48).

(S-B15) ("Whoaaaaa")
(B-49) to (B-51) are scenes returning from Dark Nana to Nana. In scene (B-49), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Waaaaahh" is output in Nana's voice. Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. Dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Nana's mouth opens and closes as in (B-49) to (B-51).

(S-B16) ("What... what have I been doing up until now...")
(B-52) to (B-54) are scenes in which Nana speaks lines. In scene (B-52), the sound of the lines is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the lines "Huh... what have I been doing up until now..." are output in Nana's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the lines. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Nana's mouth opens and closes as in (B-52) to (B-54).

(S-B17) ("Case closed!")
(B-55) to (B-57) are scenes in which Mumu speaks lines. In scene (B-55), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Case closed!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the sound of the line is said. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (B-55) to (B-57).

(Pattern display, pattern confirmation, no dialogue)
(B-58) to (B-66) are scenes where the three decorative patterns are displayed and the decorative patterns stop. As in (B-58), the subtitles for Mumu's catchphrase (Case closed!) that were displayed up to (B-57) disappear, and the background changes to display the three decorative patterns. As can be seen in (B-57), Mumu is still with her mouth open before the background is changed to make it easier to understand that she is speaking. In (B-60) to (B-62), the three decorative patterns are enlarged and then displayed in their normal positions. In (B-63), the message "Completely resolved" is displayed again, which means that Mumu has brought Nana to her senses, but no sound is output. Because the background has changed from the battle scene, the words "Completely settled" are not spoken, allowing the player to bask in the silence and celebration. As shown in (B-65), the background returns to the state before the SP Reach was executed, and "222" and the decorative symbols are displayed in a line, and as shown in (B-66), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, ending the flow of the SP Reach.

(S-B18) ("Get out of the way...")
(B-67) to (B-69) are scenes in which it is announced that Dark Nana has not been attacked by Mumu. In scene (B-67), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Get out of my way..." is output in Dark Nana's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. As in (B-67) to (B-69), Dark Nana's mouth opens and closes.

(Design confirmed, no dialogue)
(B-70) to (B-74) are scenes where a loss is notified by a decorative symbol and scenes where the decorative symbols stop. As in (B-71) and (B-72), the decorative symbol "1" is displayed, as in (B-73), the decorative symbols are displayed in a state where the decorative symbols are not aligned, such as "212", and as in (B-74), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the series of SP reach flows ends.

(Example 1 of high-base fluctuations: dialogue details)
FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds output in the above-mentioned variation example 1 (FIGS. 148 and 149) in the high base. Details are given below for each dialogue sound. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in the variation example 1 in the high base are managed by symbols such as S-14-O (the numbers in the circles are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-14-1) ("I feel a presence...")
(14-4) to (14-7) are scenes in which the conversation preview is executed after the fluctuation has started. As in (14-4) and (14-5), the frame in which the words and characters of the conversation are displayed rotates and expands. As in (14-6), the frame is placed in a fixed position and the contents of the conversation become visible, and as in (14-7), a line is output in Mumu's voice, such as "I sense your presence...". The text display is displayed exactly as the lines sound. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display. As in (14-6) and (14-7), Mumu's mouth does not move and remains open.

(S-14-2) ("Something is coming!")
(14-8) and (14-9) are scenes in which a conversation preview is executed. A frame appears from the left side of the display area, and Nana's voice outputs a line such as "Something is... coming!". The text is displayed in accordance with the line. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of the display. As shown in (14-9), Jam's mouth does not move and remains open.

(S-14-3) ("Here it comes!!")
(14-10) to (14-12) are scenes in which a conversation preview is executed. As in (14-10), the displayed frame slides up, and as in (14-11) and (14-12), a frame frames in from the left side of the display area, and Mumu's voice is output saying something like, "I'm here!!" The text is displayed exactly as it sounds. The text display remains stationary from the start to the end of its display, without changing size or position. As in (14-12), Mumu's mouth does not move and remains open.

(S-14-4) ("With all my might")
(14-13) is a scene where a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As shown in (14-13), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed, and the line "Put your energy into it" is output in Mumu's voice. The text display is different from the line sound. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of its display.

(S-14-5) ("I won't lose")
(14-14) to (14-16) are scenes in which a cut-in of Mumu is displayed as a reaction to pressing a button or the expiration of the valid period for pressing a button. In scene (14-14), a cut-in is displayed along with a spoken line being output. Here, the line "I won't lose" is output in Mumu's voice. Text is displayed that is different from the spoken line. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of its display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (14-14) to (14-16).

(S-14-6) ("Here we go")
Scenes (14-17) and (14-18) are scenes where an expansion icon is displayed. In scene (14-17), the decorative pattern is in a reach mode, and as in scene (14-18), an expansion icon is displayed and the line "I'm going" is output in Mumu's voice. The text display is different from the line sound.

(Example 2 of high-base fluctuations: dialogue details)
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds output in the above-mentioned variation example 1 (FIGS. 150 and 151) in the high base. Details are given below for each dialogue sound. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in the variation example 2 in the high base are managed by symbols such as S-15-O (the numbers inside the circles are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-15-1) ("Push--")
(15-2) is a scene where a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As shown in (15-2), the button display and the text "Press" are displayed, and the line "Press..." is output in the voice of Mumu. The text display is different from the line sound.

(S-15-2) ("Keep it up")
(15-3) is a scene in which a step-up image of Mumu is displayed as a reaction to pressing a button or the expiration of the valid period for pressing the button. As shown in (15-3), a step-up image of Mumu is displayed and the line "Keep it up" is output in Mumu's voice. The text is displayed exactly as it sounds. Mumu's mouth is open and does not move.

(S-15-3) ("One more")
(15-4) is a scene where a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As shown in (15-4), the button display and the text "Press" are displayed, and the line "One more" is output in the voice of Mumu. The text display is different from the line sound.

(S-15-4) ("It's just beginning.")
(15-5) is a scene in which a step-up image of Mumu is displayed as a reaction to pressing a button or the expiration of the valid period for pressing the button. As shown in (15-5), a step-up image of Mumu is displayed and the line "It's about to begin" is output in Mumu's voice. The text is displayed exactly as it sounds. Mumu's mouth remains open and does not move.

(S-15-5) ("Further")
(15-6) is a scene where a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As shown in (15-6), the button display and the text "Press" are displayed, and the line "Further" is output in Mumu's voice. The text display is different from the line sound.

(S-15-6) ("That's awesome!")
(15-7) to (15-9) are scenes in which a step-up image of Mumu is displayed as a reaction to pressing a button or the expiration of the valid period for pressing a button. As in (15-7), a step-up image of Mumu is displayed, and the line "That's awesome!" is output in Mumu's voice. The text is displayed in the same way as the lines sound. The text display is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display. As in (15-7) to (15-9), Mumu's mouth opens and closes.
(S-15-7) ("Here we go")
Scenes (15-10) and (15-11) are scenes where an expansion icon is displayed. In scene (15-10), the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and as in scene (15-11), an expansion icon is displayed and the line "I'm going" is output in Mumu's voice. The text display is different from the line sound.

(Rapid Hit Chance (High Base) Dialogue Sound Details)
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds that are output during the aforementioned rapid-fire chance (FIGS. 152 and 153). Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used during rapid-fire chances (high base) are managed by symbols such as S-16-O (the numbers inside the O are numbers assigned in the order in which they appear). The dialogue sounds are the same as those during the low base rapid-fire chances, but for convenience, the dialogue symbols are written with different numbers.

(S-16-1) ("Press the button to fill up the meter.")
(16-1) is a scene where the title of a performance such as a chance to hit repeatedly is announced. As shown in (16-1), the line "Press the button to fill the meter" is output by a voice narration. The text display is "chance to hit repeatedly" and "press the button to fill the meter", and the text display and the voice output do not match. This is because the text display is displayed in accordance with the worldview of the game machine (in this case, the mission of strengthening Mumu is imposed, so the display is in the imperative form) to make the player more engrossed in the game, while the voice output is output in a polite form rather than an imperative form, since some players may be dissatisfied if the voice output is in the imperative form. Also, since the main text display "chance to hit repeatedly" is displayed larger, the auxiliary display "press the button to fill the meter" may not be noticed, so the "chance to hit repeatedly" is not read out, and instead, a polite version of "press the button to fill the meter" is output as "press the button to fill the meter".

((S-16-2) “READY”)
(16-2) is a scene where the player is prompted to prepare for button presses. As shown in (16-2), the narrator outputs the line "READY." The text display and the audio output match. Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed but her voice is not heard.

(S-16-3) ("Push--")
(16-3) is the scene where the button press begins. In (16-3), the line "Push it" is output as a narration voice. The text display is "GO!", but the voice output is "Push it", so the text display and the voice output do not match. This is because the voice is designed to output the action the player should now take, in order to be more direct than "GO!". Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed, but no voice output for Mumu is made.

(S-16-4) (“MAX”)
(16-10) is a scene where the button press results in success. As in (16-10), the narrator outputs the line "MAX." The text display and audio output are It matches. Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed but the sound of Mumu is not output.

(S-16-5) ("Disappointing")
(16-7) is a scene where the failure is announced as a result of repeatedly pressing the button. As in (16-7), the line "Too bad" is output as a voice narration. This is a scene where no text is displayed. Also, this is a scene where Mumu is displayed but the voice of Mumu is not output.

(SP Reach C dialogue sound details)
Figures 190 to 192 are diagrams for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds that are output in the above-mentioned SP Reach C (Figures 154 to 159). Details are given below for each dialogue sound. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in SP Reach C are managed by symbols such as S-C 0 (the numbers inside the 0 are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-C1) ("I can still eat more.")
(C-1) to (C-3) are scenes in which Boingo speaks lines. In scene (C-1), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitle is displayed. Here, the line "I can still eat more" is output in Boingo's voice. The dialogue subtitle is displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitle is displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of its display. Boingo's mouth opens and closes as shown in (C-1) to (C-3).

(S-C2) ("VS Boingo")
(C-4) is a scene in which the title of SP Reach C, "VS Boingo", is announced. In the (C-4) scene, dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the dialogue "VS Boingo" is output as a narration voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display.

(S-C3) ("I've eaten all the food in town.")
(C-5) to (C-7) are scenes in which Boingo speaks lines. In scene (C-5), the sound of the line is output and the line subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I've eaten all the food in town" is output in Boingo's voice. The line subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The line subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Boingo's mouth opens and closes as in (C-5) to (C-7).

(S-C4) ("That's enough!")
(C-8) is a scene before Mumu appears in front of Boingo. In the (C-8) scene, dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "That's enough!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(S-C5) ("To you")
(C-9) to (C-11) are scenes before Mumu attacks Boingo. In scene (C-9), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "You..." is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (C-9) to (C-11).

(S-C6) ("I won't let you like me any more!")
(C-12) to (C-14) are scenes before Mumu attacks Boingo. In scene (C-12), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I won't let you do anything more than that!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (C-12) to (C-14).

(S-C7) ("Take that! Boingo!")
(C-15) and (C-16) are scenes in which Mumu attacks Boingo. In scene (C-15), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Take that! Boingo!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display.

(S-C8) ("I'll do my best")
(C-17) is a scene in which a cut-in display of Mumu is made. In scene (C-17), dialogue subtitles are displayed along with the sound of the dialogue being output. Here, the line "I'll do my best" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the dialogue. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display.

(S-C9) ("Push")
(C-18) and (C-19) are scenes in which a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As in (C-18), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed shrinking from an enlarged state. As in (C-19), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed in a fixed size and fixed position, and the line "Press" is output in the voice of Mumu. In this way, the text display "Press" starts out at a size different from the size (fixed size) that will ultimately be displayed, and is displayed at the fixed size while changing the size. Also, the text display "Press" starts out at a position different from the position (fixed position) that will ultimately be displayed, and is displayed in the fixed position while changing the position.

(S-C10) ("I'm sorry")
(C-23) is a scene in which Boingo is attacked by Mumu and sent flying far away. In the (C-23) scene, dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I'm sorry" is output in Boingo's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(S-C11) ("I did it!")
(C-24) to (C-26) are scenes in which Mumu is happy. In scene (C-24), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Yay!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as shown in (C-24) to (C-26).

(S-C12) ("Case closed!")
(C-27) to (C-29) are scenes in which Mumu is happy. In scene (C-27), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Case closed!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (C-27) to (C-29).

(Design confirmed, no dialogue)
(C-30) to (C-36) are scenes where the set of three decorative symbols is displayed and the decorative symbols stop. As in (C-32) to (C-35), the set of three decorative symbols expands and shrinks to a fixed size and position. The decorative symbols stop at (C-36).

(S-C13) ("Don't get in the way!")
(C-37) is a scene in which it is announced that Boingo was not attacked by Mumu. In the scene (C-37), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Don't get in the way!" is output in Boingo's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display.

(Design confirmed, no dialogue)
(C-38) to (C-41) are scenes where a loss is notified by a decorative symbol and scenes where the decorative symbols stop. As in (C-38) and (C-39), the decorative symbol "1" is displayed, as in (C-40), the decorative symbols are displayed in a state where the decorative symbols are not aligned, such as "212", and as in (C-41), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the series of SP reach flows ends.

(SP Reach D dialogue sound details)
Figures 193 to 195 are diagrams for explaining in more detail the dialogue sounds that are output in the above-mentioned SP Reach D (Figures 160 to 165). Details are given below for each dialogue sound. Each dialogue sound is assigned a symbol in the order in which it is output. The dialogue sounds used in SP Reach D are managed by symbols such as S-D 0 (the numbers inside the 0 are assigned in the order in which they appear).

(S-D1) ("I'm still going wild!")
(D-1) and (D-2) are scenes in which Bakuchu speaks lines. In scene (D-1), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I'm going wild even more" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-1) to (D-3).

(S-D2) (VS Bakuchu)
(D-3) is a scene in which the title of SP Reach D, "VS Bakuchu", is announced. In the (D-3) scene, dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the dialogue "VS Bakuchu" is output as a narration voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in accordance with the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display.

(S-D3) ("I'm the strongest!")
(D-4) to (D-6) are scenes in which Bakuchu speaks lines. In scene (D-4), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. In this case, the line "I'm the strongest!" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-4) to (D-6).

(S-D4) ("No one can stop me!")
(D-7) to (D-9) are scenes in which Bakuchu speaks lines. In scene (D-7), the sound of the line is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed. In this case, the line "No one can stop me!" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the sound of the line. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-7) to (D-9).

(S-D5) ("Huh? Something's coming.")
(D-10) is a scene where Bakuchu notices something. In the (D-10) scene, dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Huh? Something is coming" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(S-D6) ("That's enough! Bakuchu!")
(D-11) to (D-13) are scenes in which Mumu appears. In scene (D-11), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "That's enough! Bakuchu!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-11) to (D-13).

(S-D7) ("I won't let you do whatever you want with me!")
(D-14) to (D-16) are scenes in which Mumu appears. In scene (D-16), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I won't let you do anything more than that!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed exactly as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-14) to (D-16).

(S-D8) ("Take this!")
(D-17) to (D-19) are scenes before Mumu attacks Bakuchu. In scene (D-17), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Take this!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Bakuchu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-17) to (D-19).

(S-D9) ("Let's go! Bakuchu!")
(D-20) and (D-21) are scenes in which Mumu attacks Bakuchu. In scene (D-20), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Let's go! Bakuchu!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(S-D10) ("I'll do my best")
(D-22) is a scene in which a cut-in display of Mumu is made. In the (D-22) scene, dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "I'll do my best" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sound. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(S-D11) ("Push")
(D-23) and (D-24) are scenes in which a button is displayed to encourage the player to press the button. As in (D-23), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed shrinking from an enlarged state. As in (D-24), the button display and the text display "Press" are displayed at a fixed size and at a fixed position, and the line "Press" is output in the voice of Mumu. In this way, the text display "Press" starts out at a size different from the size (fixed size) that will ultimately be displayed, and is displayed at the fixed size while changing the size. Also, the text display "Press" starts out at a position different from the position (fixed position) that will ultimately be displayed, and is displayed at the fixed position while changing the position.

(S-D12) ("Remember that~")
(D-28) is a scene where Bakuchu is attacked by Mumu and sent flying far away. In the (D-28) scene, dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. In this scene, the line "Remember that~" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(S-D13) ("I did it!")
(D-29) to (D-31) are scenes in which Mumu is happy. In scene (D-29), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Yay!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-29) to (D-31).

(S-D14) ("Case closed!")
(D-32) to (D-34) are scenes in which Mumu is happy. In scene (D-32), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "Case closed!" is output in Mumu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of their display. Mumu's mouth opens and closes as in (D-32) to (D-34).

(Design confirmed, no dialogue)
(D-35) to (D-41) are scenes where three sets of decorative symbols are displayed and scenes where the decorative symbols stop. (D-35) to (D-40) are not shown, but are the same as (C-30) to (C-35). The decorative symbols stop at (D-41).

(S-D15) ("You're not here")
(D-42) is a scene in which it is announced that Bakuchu was not hit by Mumu's attack. In the scene (D-42), dialogue sounds are output and dialogue subtitles are displayed. Here, the line "You weren't called" is output in Bakuchu's voice. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in the same way as the dialogue sounds. The dialogue subtitles are displayed in a stationary manner without changing size or position from the start to the end of display.

(Design confirmed, no dialogue)
(D-42) to (D-46) are scenes where a loss is notified by a decorative symbol and scenes where the decorative symbols stop. As in (D-43) and (D-44), the decorative symbol "1" is displayed, as in (D-45), the decorative symbols are displayed in a state where the decorative symbols are not aligned, such as "212", and as in (D-46), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the series of SP reach flows ends.

From here on, we will use the tables in Figures 196 to 204 to explain various perspectives in situations where dialogue and other sounds are output with the low and high base sounds that we have explained so far. The various perspectives are as follows.

(Character making a sound)
It is stated which character is making the sound.

(Character displayed)
It is written which character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the corresponding dialogue or other sound is being output. If a character is displayed, the character's name is written. If a character is not displayed (such as in a scene where a button is displayed), it is written "no character displayed." Also, in scenes where characters are facing each other, multiple names of the displayed characters are written.

(The character's mouth making the sound)
In a situation where the corresponding dialogue or other sound is being output and the character outputting the corresponding dialogue or other sound is being displayed on the liquid crystal display device, it is described whether the mouth of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device is moving or still. For scenes in which the mouth is opening and closing, it is described as "moving." If the mouth remains open or closed, it is described as "still." In addition, if the character for which the voice is being output is not displayed, or if the character is displayed but the mouth of the character for which the voice is being output is not displayed (for example, if only the arms are displayed or if a cut-in display is made to hide the mouth), it is described as "X."

(Audio and text display)
It indicates whether the voice being spoken and the displayed text display match or do not match. If they match, a "O" is entered in the match column. If they do not match, a "O" is entered in the mismatch column. The condition for a match is that the displayed text and the voice being output match perfectly, and if there is even a single character difference, it is considered a mismatch.

(Situation A) (Variation Example 1 at Low Base)
FIG. 196(A) is a table summarizing various aspects of the sounds such as dialogue sounds output in FIGS. 173 and 174.

(Situation B) (Variation Example 2 at Low Base)
FIG. 196(B) is a table summarizing the dialogue and other sounds output in FIGS. 175 and 176 from various viewpoints.

(Situation C) (Chance to hit repeatedly)
FIG. 197 is a table summarizing various aspects of the sounds such as dialogue sounds output in FIG. 177.

(Situation D) (SP Reach A Failed)
FIG. 198(A) is a table summarizing the dialogue and other sounds output in FIGS. 178, 179, and 181 from various viewpoints.

(Situation E) (SP Reach A Big Hit)
FIG. 198(B) is a table summarizing the dialogue and other sounds output in FIGS. 178, 179, and 180 from various viewpoints.

(Situation F) (SP Reach B Missed)
FIG. 199 is a table summarizing, from various viewpoints, the sounds such as dialogue sounds output in FIG. 186 from FIGS. 182 to 184 (B-45).

(Situation G) (SP Reach B Big Hit)
FIG. 200 is a table summarizing the speech sounds and other sounds output in FIGS. 182 to 185 from various viewpoints.

(Situation H) (Example 1 of fluctuations at a high base)
FIG. 201(A) is a table summarizing various aspects of each sound, such as dialogue, that is output in FIG. 187.

(Situation I) (Variation Example 2 on a High Base)
FIG. 201(B) is a table summarizing various aspects of each sound, such as dialogue, that is output in FIG. 188.

(Situation I) (Chance of consecutive hits (high base))
FIG. 202 is a table summarizing various aspects of each sound, such as dialogue, that is output in FIG. 189.

(Situation J) (SP Reach C Missed)
FIG. 203(A) is a table summarizing, from various viewpoints, each of the sounds such as dialogue sounds output in FIG. 192, up to FIGS. 190 and 191 (C-19).

(Situation K) (SP Reach C Big Hit)
FIG. 203(B) is a table summarizing the dialogue and other sounds output in FIGS. 190 and 191 from various viewpoints.

(Situation L) (SP Reach D Missed)
FIG. 204(A) is a table summarizing, from various viewpoints, each of the sounds such as dialogue sounds output in FIG. 195, up to FIGS. 193 and 194 (D-24).

(Situation M) (SP Reach D Big Hit)
FIG. 204(B) is a table summarizing the dialogue and other sounds output in FIGS. 193 and 194 from various viewpoints.

Next, the characteristic settings for each sub-fluctuation pattern of this gaming machine will be explained using Figures 205 to 225. Figures 205 to 224 are tables for each sub-fluctuation pattern composed of the various situations explained in Figures 196 to 204. Figure 225 is a table that compiles the number of times sound is output, the number of scenes with the mouth moving, the number of scenes with the mouth still, the number of scenes where the sound and text display match, and the number of scenes where the sound and text display do not match, counted from the tables of Figures 205 to 224. Figures 205 to 214 are tables of sub-fluctuation patterns at a low base, and Figures 215 to 224 are tables of sub-fluctuation patterns at a high base.

(Parameter table for each line (A)) (Sub-variation pattern 16)
Figure 205 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 16 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (B)) (Sub-variation pattern 47)
Figure 206 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 47 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (C)) (Sub-variation pattern 17)
Figure 207 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the sub-variation pattern 17 variation to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (D)) (Sub-variation pattern 48)
Figure 208 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of variation of the sub-variation pattern 48 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (E)) (Sub-variation pattern 22)
Figure 209 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 22 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (F)) (Sub-variation pattern 53)
Figure 210 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 53 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (G)) (Sub-variation pattern 23)
Figure 211 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 23 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (H)) (Sub-variation pattern 54)
Figure 212 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 54 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (I)) (Sub-variation pattern 20)
Figure 213 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 20 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (J)) (Sub-variation pattern 51)
Figure 214 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 51 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (K)) (Sub-variation pattern 77)
Figure 215 is a parameter table for each output scene of the dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 77 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (L)) (Sub-variation pattern 87)
Figure 216 is a parameter table for each output scene of the dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 87 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (M)) (Sub-variation pattern 78)
Figure 217 is a parameter table for each output scene of the dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 78 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (N)) (Sub-variation pattern 88)
Figure 218 is a parameter table for each output scene of the dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 88 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (O)) (Sub-variation pattern 81)
Figure 219 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 81 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (P)) (Sub-variation pattern 91)
Figure 220 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 91 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (Q)) (Sub-variation pattern 82)
Figure 221 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 82 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (R)) (Sub-variation pattern 92)
Figure 222 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 92 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (S)) (Sub-variation pattern 79)
Figure 223 is a parameter table for each output scene of the dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 79 to the determination of the pattern.

(Parameter table for each line (T)) (Sub-variation pattern 89)
Figure 224 is a parameter table for each output scene of dialogue voice that occurs from the start of the variation of the sub-variation pattern 89 to the determination of the pattern.

(For each pair of sub-variation patterns)
The sub-variation patterns described above are paired with each other in the form of miss variation and big win variation. The pairing is as follows:
Pair 1: Sub-fluctuation pattern 16 and sub-fluctuation pattern 47
Pair 2: Sub-fluctuation pattern 17 and sub-fluctuation pattern 48
Pair 3: Sub-fluctuation pattern 22 and sub-fluctuation pattern 53
Pair 4: Sub-fluctuation pattern 23 and sub-fluctuation pattern 54
Pair 5: Sub-fluctuation pattern 20 and sub-fluctuation pattern 51
Pair 6: Sub-fluctuation pattern 77 and sub-fluctuation pattern 87
Pair 7: Sub-fluctuation pattern 78 and sub-fluctuation pattern 88
Pair 8: Sub-fluctuation pattern 81 and sub-fluctuation pattern 91
Pair 9: Sub-fluctuation pattern 82 and sub-fluctuation pattern 92
Pair 10: Sub-fluctuation pattern 79 and sub-fluctuation pattern 89
The sub-fluctuation patterns that are paired are the same from the start of the fluctuation to the announcement of the win or loss. If it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the jackpot epilogue scene (SP Reach A in Fig. 180 (A-40) to (A-55), SP Reach B in Fig. 184 (B-46) to Fig. 185 (B-66)) is executed, and if it is a loss fluctuation pattern, the loss epilogue scene (SP Reach A in Fig. 181, SP Reach B in Fig. 186) is executed. This is the difference between the fluctuation patterns.

(Number of outputs and number of scenes for each sub-variation pattern)
Figure 225 is a table that compiles the number of times sound is output, the number of scenes with the mouth moving, the number of scenes with the mouth still, the number of scenes where the sound and the text display match, and the number of scenes where the sound and the text display do not match, counted from the tables of Figures 205 to 224. Each item will be explained below. Note that the count for each item is divided into whether the scene being counted is during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach, or during the SP reach.

(Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed)
The first item is the number of times that Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed. This is an item that is counted as one time if Mumu is displayed in a scene in which Mumu's voice is output. For example, Fig. 173 (1-6) (a situation in which dialogue number S-1-1 is output) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed in a conversation presentation, and so the output of Mumu's voice in situations in which Mumu is displayed during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach is counted.

(Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed)
The second item is the number of times that Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed. This is an item that is counted as one time when Mumu is not displayed in a scene in which Mumu's voice is output. For example, FIG. 173 (1-8) (a situation in which dialogue number S-1-2 is output) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed in a scene in which the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and therefore the output of Mumu's voice in a situation in which Mumu is not displayed during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach is counted. Also, FIG. 179 (A-34) (A-35) (a situation in which dialogue number S-A8 is output) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed, and therefore the output of Mumu's voice in a situation in which Mumu is not displayed during the period during the SP reach is counted. Fig. 173 (1-8) (a situation where line number S-1-2 is output) shows a situation where no characters, including Mumu, are displayed, and Fig. 179 (A-34) (A-35) (a situation where line number S-A8 is output) shows a situation where a character other than Mumu (Bakuchu) is displayed. Both situations show the output of Mumu's voice when Mumu is not displayed.

(Number of times sounds other than "Mumu" are output when "Mumu" is displayed)
The third item is the number of times sounds other than Mumu are output when Mumu is displayed. This is an item that is counted as one time if Mumu is displayed in a scene in which sounds other than Mumu are output. For example, Figure 179 (A-19) (a situation in which dialogue number S-A2 is output) is a scene in which the title of SP Reach A is announced and a sound other than Mumu (a narration sound) is output when Mumu is displayed, so this is the subject of the count for the output of sounds other than Mumu when Mumu is displayed during the period of SP Reach.

(Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking)
The fourth item is the number of scenes in which the mouth of a character who is speaking is still. This is an item that is counted as one time when a character is displayed in a scene in which the voice of the character is output and the character's mouth is still. For example, FIG. 173 (1-6) (a situation in which the line number S-1-1 is output) is a scene in which the voice of Mumu is output in a conversation performance, Mumu is displayed, and Mumu's mouth is still, so it is counted as a scene in which the mouth of a character who is speaking is still during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach. The mouth being still refers to the mouth of the character display remaining closed and not opening, or the mouth of the character display remaining open and not closing, or opening further.

(Number of scenes in which the character's mouth moves while speaking)
The fifth item is the number of scenes in which the mouth of a character who is speaking moves. This is an item that is counted as one time when a character is displayed and the character's mouth is moving in a scene in which the voice of that character is output. For example, FIG. 179 (A-24) to (A-26) (a situation in which line number S-A5 is output) is a scene in which the voice of Mumu is output during SP Reach A, Mumu is displayed, and Mumu's mouth is moving, so this is counted as a scene in which the mouth of a character who is speaking moves during the period of SP Reach. The mouth moving refers to the mouth of the character opening and closing, or opening an open mouth further.

(Number of scenes where the audio and text match)
The sixth item is the number of scenes where the voice and text display match. This is an item that is counted as one time when text display is displayed in a scene where the voice of any character is output, and the text display matches the content of the output voice. For example, FIG. 173 (1-6) (a situation where line number S-1-1 is output) is a scene in which Mumu's voice is output in a conversation performance, saying "What would look good on me?", and a line window saying "What would look good on me?" is displayed as the text display, so this is counted as a scene where the voice and text display match during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach.

(Number of scenes where the audio and text do not match)
The seventh item is the number of scenes where the sound and the text display do not match. This is an item that is counted as one time when text display is displayed in a scene where the sound of any character is output, and the content of the output sound does not match. For example, FIG. 175 (2-4) (a situation where dialogue number S-2-1 is output) is a scene where the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and Mumu's voice outputs "It's your chance!", and the text display shows "REACH," so this is counted as a scene where the sound and the text display do not match during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the SP reach.

From here, we will compare each item. For each item, we will use the paired sub-fluctuation patterns in the low base and the paired sub-fluctuation patterns in the high base. We will compare the miss fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns in the sub-fluctuation patterns in the low base, the miss fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns in the sub-fluctuation patterns in the high base, the miss fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns in the sub-fluctuation patterns in the low base, and the miss fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns in the sub-fluctuation patterns in the high base.

(Comparison of the number of times the "Mumu" sound is emitted when the "Mumu" sound is displayed and when the "Mumu" sound is not displayed)
A comparison is made using sub-fluctuation pattern 16 at the low base, sub-fluctuation pattern 47 at the low base, sub-fluctuation pattern 78 at the high base, and sub-fluctuation pattern 88 at the high base. With reference to the table in FIG. 225, the number of occurrences in each fluctuation pattern is summarized as follows.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 7 times Sub-variation pattern 78 (SP Reach C Missed)
Number of times the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: 6 times The number of times that the voice is output is distributed as follows:
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (5 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (5 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (4 times)
Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A big hit)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (5 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (6 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (4 times)
Sub-fluctuation pattern 78 (SP Reach C Miss)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (4 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (4 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (3 times)
Sub-variation pattern 88 (SP Reach C big hit)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (4 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed: During SP Reach (6 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (3 times)

(Comparison of the number of times the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is displayed and the number of times the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is not displayed) (Low base miss fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-variation pattern 16 and the sub-variation pattern 47 at the low base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed so that the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed. This design makes it possible to output the voice of a specific character in various situations, such as when the specific character is displayed or not displayed, and further has the effect of drawing more attention to the specific character by increasing the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed. In particular, by designing Mumu, the main character of this gaming machine, with this feature, it has the effect of making Mumu stand out more.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater during a jackpot variation than during a miss variation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to a specific character during a jackpot variation.
Also, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed. With this design, in a scene where the attention is high as to whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, will be announced, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is relatively greater, which has the effect of allowing the player to empathize more with Mumu and increasing the sense of excitement.

(Comparison of the number of times the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is displayed and the number of times the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is not displayed) (High base miss fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-variation pattern 78 and the sub-variation pattern 88 at the high base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed so that the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed. This design makes it possible to output the voice of a specific character in various situations, such as when the specific character is displayed or not displayed, and further has the effect of drawing more attention to the specific character by increasing the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed. In particular, by designing Mumu, the main character of this gaming machine, with this feature, it has the effect of making Mumu stand out more.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater during a jackpot variation than during a miss variation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to a specific character during a jackpot variation.
Also, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed. With this design, in a scene where the attention is high as to whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, will be announced, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is relatively greater, which has the effect of allowing the player to empathize more with Mumu and increasing the sense of excitement.

(Comparison of the number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is displayed and the number of times Mumu's voice is output when Mumu is not displayed) (Low base miss fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern, high base miss fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-fluctuation pattern 16 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 47 at the low base are paired fluctuation patterns, and the sub-fluctuation pattern 78 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 88 at the high base are paired fluctuation patterns, and all of these sub-fluctuation patterns are designed so that the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed. This design makes it possible to output the voice of a specific character in various situations, such as when a specific character is displayed or not displayed, and furthermore, by increasing the number of times that the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention to the specific character. In particular, by designing Mumu, the main character of this gaming machine, with this feature, it is possible to make Mumu stand out more. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned distinctive design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, Mumu is made prominent in the low base state in which the player always plays, allowing the player to recognize the character Mumu, and by also making Mumu prominent in the high base state to which the player transitions after hitting a jackpot, the high base state in which the player plays after recognizing the character Mumu in the low base can be made more exciting, and the above-mentioned distinctive design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base can produce effects that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned distinctive design.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the sound of Mumu is output in a situation where Mumu is displayed is greater in a jackpot fluctuation than in a miss fluctuation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to a specific character in a jackpot fluctuation. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, Mumu is made more prominent than a miss fluctuation in a jackpot fluctuation in a low base state where a player always plays, and the player is made to recognize the character Mumu, and then in a jackpot fluctuation in a high base state to which the player transitions after a jackpot, Mumu is made more prominent than a miss fluctuation, so that the high base state where the player plays after recognizing the character Mumu in the low base can be made more exciting. Furthermore, Mumu can be made to stand out as much as possible in a jackpot fluctuation that notifies a jackpot in a high base state, which is the jackpot that brings the most joy in a gaming machine, and the player can empathize more strongly. This is an effect that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states, low base and high base.
Also, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is not displayed. With this design, in a scene where the attention is high as to whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, will be announced, the number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is relatively greater, which has the effect of allowing the player to empathize more with Mumu and increasing the sense of excitement. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, in scenes where there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the form of an SP reach will be announced in the low base state in which the player is sure to play, the number of times that the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is displayed increases relatively, allowing the player to empathize more with Mumu and heighten the sense of excitement; and further, in scenes where there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the high base state, the SP reach in the high base state, which is the jackpot that brings the most joy in a gaming machine, will be announced, the number of times that the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is displayed increases relatively, allowing the player to empathize more with Mumu and heighten the sense of excitement. This is an effect that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base.

(Comparison of the number of times the "Mumu" sound was output when "Mumu" was displayed and the number of times sounds other than "Mumu" were output when "Mumu" was displayed)
A comparison is made using sub-fluctuation pattern 16 at a low base, sub-fluctuation pattern 47 at a low base, sub-fluctuation pattern 77 at a high base, and sub-fluctuation pattern 87 at a high base. With reference to the table in FIG. 225, the number of occurrences in each fluctuation pattern is summarized as follows.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 9 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 10 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 2 times Sub-fluctuation pattern 77 (SP Reach C Missed)
Number of times that the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of times that the sound of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed: 7 times Number of times that sounds other than Mumu are output when Mumu is displayed: 1 time

(Comparison of the number of times the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is displayed and the number of times sounds other than Mumu are output when Mumu is displayed) (Low base miss fluctuation pattern, low base hit fluctuation pattern)
The sub-fluctuation pattern 16 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 47 at the low base are paired fluctuation patterns, and all of these sub-fluctuation patterns are designed so that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed. This design provides a case where the voice of a specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, and a case where a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output, thereby increasing the number of times the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, and thereby achieving the effect of drawing more attention to the specific character.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater during a jackpot variation than during a miss variation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to a specific character during a jackpot variation.

(Comparison of the number of times the Mumu sound is output when Mumu is displayed and the number of times sounds other than Mumu are output when Mumu is displayed) (High base miss fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The above-mentioned sub-variation pattern 77 and sub-variation pattern 87 at the high base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed so that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed. This design provides a case where the voice of a specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, and a case where a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output, thereby increasing the number of times the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, and thereby achieving the effect of drawing more attention to the specific character.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater during a jackpot variation than during a miss variation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to a specific character during a jackpot variation.

(Comparison of the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed and the number of times a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed) (Low base miss fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern, high base miss fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-fluctuation pattern 16 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 47 in the low base are paired fluctuation patterns, and the sub-fluctuation pattern 78 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 88 in the high base are paired fluctuation patterns, and all of these sub-fluctuation patterns are designed so that the number of times the voice of Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed is greater than the number of times a voice other than Mumu is output when Mumu is displayed. This design allows for a variety of expressions while increasing the number of times the voice of a specific character is displayed by providing a case in which the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed and a case in which a voice different from the voice of the specific character is output, and furthermore, by increasing the number of times the voice of the specific character is output when the specific character is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention to the specific character. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned distinctive design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, Mumu is made prominent in the low base state in which the player always plays, allowing the player to recognize the character Mumu, and by also making Mumu prominent in the high base state to which the player transitions after hitting a jackpot, the high base state in which the player plays after recognizing the character Mumu in the low base can be made more exciting, and the above-mentioned distinctive design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base can produce effects that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned distinctive design.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the sound of Mumu is output in a situation where Mumu is displayed is greater in a jackpot fluctuation than in a miss fluctuation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to a specific character in a jackpot fluctuation. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, Mumu is made more prominent than a miss fluctuation in a jackpot fluctuation in a low base state where a player always plays, and the player is made to recognize the character Mumu, and then in a jackpot fluctuation in a high base state to which the player transitions after a jackpot, Mumu is made more prominent than a miss fluctuation, so that the high base state where the player plays after recognizing the character Mumu in the low base can be made more exciting. Furthermore, Mumu can be made to stand out as much as possible in a jackpot fluctuation that notifies a jackpot in a high base state, which is the jackpot that brings the most joy in a gaming machine, and the player can empathize more strongly. This is an effect that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states, low base and high base.

(Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking vs. number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving while speaking)
A comparison is made using the sub-fluctuation pattern 22 in the low base, the sub-fluctuation pattern 53 in the low base, the sub-fluctuation pattern 77 in the high base, and the sub-fluctuation pattern 87 in the high base. With reference to the table in FIG. 225, the number of occurrences in each fluctuation pattern is summarized as follows.
Sub-variation pattern 22 (SP reach B miss)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving: 10 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 53 (SP Reach B jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is moving while speaking: 13 times Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: 8 times Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C missed)
Number of scenes where the character's mouth is moving: 6 times Number of scenes where the character's mouth is still: 5 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of a character speaking lines moves: 8 times Number of scenes in which the mouth of a character speaking lines remains still: 4 times The number of times each scene is executed is allocated as follows:
Sub-variation pattern 22 (SP reach B miss)
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth remains still while speaking: From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (6 times) > During SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving SP Reach in progress (10 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 53 correspond to the corresponding points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: From the start of the change to the start of the SP reach (6 times) > During the SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving SP Reach in progress (13 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach (0 times)
In addition, the following relationships in the sub-variation pattern 77 correspond to the following points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: From the start of the change to the start of the SP reach (3 times) > During the SP reach (2 times)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving During SP reach (5 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (1 time)
In addition, the following relationships in sub-variation pattern 87 correspond to the following points.
Number of scenes in which the character's mouth is still while speaking: From the start of the change to the start of the SP reach (3 times) > During the SP reach (1 time)
Number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving During SP reach (7 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (1 time)

(Comparison of the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking remains still and the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking moves) (Low base deviation fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-variation pattern 22 and the sub-variation pattern 53 at the low base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed to have more scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking moves than scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking remains still. This design makes it possible to make the character move by dynamically displaying the mouth of the character when the character's voice is being output, and to increase the interest in the game, and by displaying the mouth of the character still at appropriate times, the performance is more vivid than if the mouth of the character is always moving dynamically, and the interest in the game is increased, and among them, the effect is achieved that it is easier to pay attention to the character by displaying the mouth of the character dynamically more frequently than if the mouth of the character is still displayed.
In addition, the design is such that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed more frequently in a big win variation than in a loss variation, which has the effect of drawing more attention to the character in a big win variation.
Also, during the period from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times the character's mouth is displayed statically is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically, and during the SP reach period, the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is displayed statically. This design has the effect of allowing the player to empathize more with the character and increasing the sense of excitement, since the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically is relatively greater in scenes where attention is focused on whether or not a jackpot, the SP reach, will be announced.

(Comparison of the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking remains still and the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking moves) (High base deviation fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-variation pattern 77 and the sub-variation pattern 87 at the high base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed to have more scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is moving than scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking is still. This design makes it possible to move the character by dynamically displaying the mouth of the character when the character's voice is being output, thereby increasing the interest in the game, and by displaying the mouth of the character still at appropriate times, the performance is more vivid than if the mouth of the character was always moving dynamically, which increases the interest in the game, and among them, the effect is achieved that it is easier to pay attention to the character by displaying the mouth of the character dynamically more frequently than if the mouth of the character is still displayed.
In addition, the design is such that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed more frequently in a big win variation than in a loss variation, which has the effect of drawing more attention to the character in a big win variation.
Also, during the period from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times the character's mouth is displayed statically is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is displayed statically. This design has the effect of allowing the player to empathize more with the character and increasing the sense of excitement, since the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically is relatively greater in scenes where attention is focused on whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, will be announced.

(Comparison of the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking remains still and the number of scenes in which the mouth of the character speaking moves) (Low base deviation fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern, high base deviation fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-fluctuation pattern 22 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 53 at the low base are paired fluctuation patterns, and the sub-fluctuation pattern 77 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 87 at the high base are paired fluctuation patterns, and all of these sub-fluctuation patterns are designed to have more scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking moves than scenes in which the mouth of the character who is speaking is stationary. This design makes it possible to move the character by dynamically displaying the mouth of the character when the character's voice is being output, thereby increasing the interest in the game, and by displaying the mouth of the character statically at appropriate times, the performance is more vivid than if the mouth of the character is constantly moving dynamically, which increases the interest in the game, and among these, it is possible to achieve the effect of making it easier to pay attention to the character by displaying the mouth of the character dynamically more frequently than if the mouth of the character is statically displayed. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, the character's mouth movements are made more distinct in the low base state in which the player is always playing, and also in the high base state to which the player transitions after a jackpot. This makes it possible to recognize the distinct movements of the character's mouth in the low base, further enhancing the excitement of the high base state in which the player is playing, thereby achieving the effects that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base.
In addition, the design is such that the character's mouth is dynamically displayed more frequently in the jackpot fluctuation than in the miss fluctuation. This design has the effect of drawing more attention to the character in the jackpot fluctuation. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, the character's mouth movement is more vivid in the jackpot fluctuation in the low base state where the player always plays than in the miss fluctuation, and the character's mouth movement is more vivid in the jackpot fluctuation in the high base state to which the player transitions after the jackpot, than in the miss fluctuation, so that the high base state where the player plays after recognizing the vividness of the character's mouth movement in the low base can be more exciting, and further, the character's mouth movement can be more vivid in the jackpot fluctuation that notifies the player of the jackpot in the high base state, which is the jackpot that brings the most joy in the gaming machine, and the player can empathize more strongly. This is an effect that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different states of a low base and a high base.
Also, during the period from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times the character's mouth is displayed statically is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically, and during the SP reach period, the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically is greater than the number of times the character's mouth is displayed statically. This design has the effect of allowing the player to empathize more with the character and increasing the sense of excitement, since the number of times the character's mouth is displayed dynamically is relatively greater in scenes where attention is focused on whether or not a jackpot, the SP reach, will be announced. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, in scenes where there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the form of an SP reach will be announced in the low base state, which the player will always play in, the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed is relatively greater, allowing the player to empathize with the character more and increasing the sense of excitement; and further, in scenes where there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the high base state, the SP reach, which is the jackpot in the high base state, which brings the most joy in a gaming machine, will be announced, the number of times the character's mouth is dynamically displayed is relatively greater, allowing the player to empathize with the character more and increasing the sense of excitement. This is an effect that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base.

(Comparison of the number of scenes where the audio and text display match with the number of scenes where the audio and text display do not match)
A comparison is made using sub-fluctuation pattern 16 at low base, sub-fluctuation pattern 47 at low base, sub-fluctuation pattern 77 at high base, and sub-fluctuation pattern 87 at high base. With reference to the table in FIG. 225, the number of occurrences in each fluctuation pattern is summarized as follows.
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Matching of lines and voice: 20 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A jackpot)
Matching of lines and voice: 21 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 2 times Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C missed)
Matching of lines and voice: 13 times Mismatching of lines and voice: 3 times Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C jackpot)
Matching of lines and audio: 15 times Mismatching of lines and audio: 3 times The number of times each scene is performed is as follows:
Sub-variation pattern 16 (SP Reach A miss)
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach A (11 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (9 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From the start of the fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (2 times) > During SP Reach A (0 times)
Sub-variation pattern 47 (SP Reach A big hit)
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach A (12 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (9 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From the start of the fluctuation to the start of SP Reach A (2 times) > During SP Reach A (0 times)
Sub-variation pattern 77 (SP Reach C miss)
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach C (10 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach C (3 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach C (3 times) > During SP Reach C (0 times)
Sub-variation pattern 87 (SP Reach C big hit)
Match between lines and voice: During SP Reach C (12 times) > From the start of fluctuation to the start of SP Reach C (3 times)
Mismatch between dialogue and voice: From start of fluctuation to start of SP Reach C (3 times) > During SP Reach C (0 times)

(Comparison of the number of scenes where the audio and text display match and the number of scenes where the audio and text display do not match) (Low base miss fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-variation pattern 16 and the sub-variation pattern 47 in the low base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed to have more scenes where the voice and the character display match than scenes where the voice and the character display do not match. This design provides diversity by providing a case where the voice output is in accordance with the display content and a case where the voice output is not in accordance with the display content, while the number of times the voice output is in accordance with the display content is greater, thereby increasing the number of times the same information is obtained from both the voice and the display, thereby increasing interest in the game.
In addition, the display is designed to output the sound more frequently in accordance with the displayed contents in the case of a big win variation than in the case of a loss variation. This design has the effect of increasing the interest in the game in the case of a big win variation.
Also, during the period from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times that the sound output is not according to the display content is greater than the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content is greater than the number of times that the sound output is not according to the display content. With this design, in a scene where the attention is high as to whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, is announced, the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content is relatively greater, so that the number of times that the same information is obtained from both the sound and the display is increased, and the effect of increasing interest in the game is achieved.

(Comparison of the number of scenes where the audio and text display match and the number of scenes where the audio and text display do not match) (High base miss fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-variation pattern 77 and the sub-variation pattern 87 in the high base are paired variation patterns, and all of these sub-variation patterns are designed to have more scenes where the voice and the character display match than scenes where the voice and the character display do not match. This design provides diversity by providing a case where the voice output is in accordance with the display content and a case where the voice output is not in accordance with the display content, while the number of times the voice output is in accordance with the display content is greater, thereby increasing the number of times the same information is obtained from both the voice and the display, thereby increasing interest in the game.
In addition, the display is designed to output the sound more frequently in accordance with the displayed contents in the case of a big win variation than in the case of a loss variation. This design has the effect of increasing the interest in the game in the case of a big win variation.
Also, during the period from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times that the sound output is not according to the display content is greater than the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content is greater than the number of times that the sound output is not according to the display content. With this design, in a scene where the attention is high as to whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, is announced, the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content is relatively greater, so that the number of times that the same information is obtained from both the sound and the display is increased, and the effect of increasing interest in the game is achieved.

(Comparison of the number of scenes where the audio and text display match and the number of scenes where the audio and text display do not match) (Low base deviation fluctuation pattern, low base jackpot fluctuation pattern, high base deviation fluctuation pattern, high base jackpot fluctuation pattern)
The sub-fluctuation pattern 16 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 47 in the low base are paired fluctuation patterns, and the sub-fluctuation pattern 77 and the sub-fluctuation pattern 87 in the high base are paired fluctuation patterns, and all of these sub-fluctuation patterns are designed to have more scenes where the voice and the character display match than scenes where the voice and the character display do not match. This design provides diversity by providing a case where the voice output is in accordance with the display content and a case where the voice output is not in accordance with the display content, and since the number of times the voice output is in accordance with the display content is greater, the effect of increasing interest in the game is achieved by increasing the number of times the same information is obtained from both the voice and the display. In particular, by making the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, the player is interested in the game in the low base state where the player always plays, and then in the high base state where the player transitions after a jackpot, the player is interested in the game, which makes the high base state more exciting, and the effect of making the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states, low base and high base, is achieved.
In addition, the design is such that the number of times the sound output is made according to the display contents is greater for jackpot fluctuations than for miss fluctuations. This design has the effect of increasing interest in the game during jackpot fluctuations. In particular, by making the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, the player is more interested in the game during jackpot fluctuations in the low base state where the player always plays, and is more interested in the game during jackpot fluctuations in the high base state to which the player transitions after a jackpot, than during miss fluctuations, making it possible to further liven up the high base state. Furthermore, the effect of increasing interest in the game during jackpot fluctuations that notify the player of the jackpot in the high base state, which is the jackpot that brings the most joy in a gaming machine, is achieved by making the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different states of the low base and high base.
During the period from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach, the number of times that the sound output is not according to the display content is greater than the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content, and during the period during the SP reach, the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content is greater than the number of times that the sound output is not according to the display content. With this design, in a scene where the attention is high as to whether or not a jackpot, which is the SP reach, is announced, the number of times that the sound output is according to the display content is relatively greater, so that the number of times that the same information is obtained from both the sound and the display is increased, and the effect of increasing interest in the game is achieved. In particular, by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base, it is possible to increase interest in the game in scenes where there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the form of an SP reach will be announced in the low base state, which is a state in which the player is sure to play, will be announced, and further, it is possible to increase interest in the game in scenes where there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the high base state, the SP reach, which is a jackpot in the high base state, which brings the most joy in a gaming machine, will be announced, which is a scene in which there is greater attention to whether or not a jackpot in the high base state will be announced.This is an effect that can only be achieved by adopting the above-mentioned characteristic design in both different base states such as a low base and a high base.

So far, we have explained the characteristic configurations using sub-variation patterns 16, 22, 47, 53, 77, 78, 87, and 88, but the sub-variation patterns 17, 48, 23, 54, 20, 51, 81, 91, 82, 92, 79, and 89 shown in Figure 225 are also variation patterns that satisfy the characteristic configurations described above.

From here on, we will provide a detailed explanation of the timing of text display and audio output for each situation.

(Time chart of various sounds in SP Reach A)
Figures 226 and 227 are time charts of various sounds in SP Reach A shown in Figures 179 to 181. The elements that make up the time charts are "dialogue sounds,""soundeffects," and "background music.""Dialoguesounds" are sounds that are emitted during SP Reach A. "Sound effects" are sound effects used to emphasize the scene. "BGM" is background music that colors the scene.

(Timing of display of dialogue subtitles and audio output corresponding to character voice)
The time charts (A-2) to (A-7) in FIG. 226 show the sound output status in the scenes (A-2) to (A-7) in FIG. 178. The scenes (A-2) to (A-7) in FIG. 178 (scenes in which the dialogue sound of (S-A1) is output) are scenes in which Mumu's voice is output saying "Stop your evil deeds! Bakuchu!" and the dialogue subtitle is displayed as "Stop your evil deeds! Bakuchu!". If we pay attention to the time chart in FIG. 226, we can see that the dialogue sound is output at the timing of (A-2). As mentioned above, the dialogue subtitle is also displayed at the timing of (A-2), so we can see that the dialogue sound is output at the same time as the dialogue subtitle is displayed. Also, at the timing of (A-2), the SE sound is not output, and the SE sound is not output until (A-7). The BGM continues to play. The dialogue sound is output with priority over the BGM. Regarding the priority here, it can be achieved by controlling the volume of the prioritized one to be output louder, by controlling the volume to be louder from the data design stage, or by controlling the volume of the non-prioritized one to be lowered when the volumes of both are the same or there is not much difference between them, etc. For (S-A3) to (S-A13) in SP Reach A, like (S-A1), the dialogue sound is output together with the dialogue subtitles, and no SE sound is output.

(Timing of reach title text display and audio output)
The time charts (A-8) to (A-19) in FIG. 226 show the sound output status in the scenes (A-8) to (A-19) in FIG. 178. The scenes (A-8) to (A-19) in FIG. 178 (scenes where the dialogue sound of (S-A2) is output) are scenes where the narration voice "Mumu VS Bakuchu" is output and the text display shows "Mumu VS Bakuchu". If we pay attention to the time chart in FIG. 226, we can see that the dialogue sound is output at the timing of (A-19). As mentioned above, in (A-8) to (A-10), the display such as "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed, and then frames out. In (A-11) to (A-13), the display such as "VS" is enlarged and displayed, and then frames out. In (A-14) to (A-16), the display such as "Bakuchu" is enlarged and displayed, and then frames out. In (A-17) to (A-19), the characters "Mumu", "VS", and "Bakuchu", which have been displayed in stages up until now, are combined and displayed in a completed form as a title. Looking at the time chart here, in the situations of (A-8) to (A-10), a sound effect such as "Dogoon" is output, and the voice of the narration is not output. In the situations of (A-11) to (A-13), a sound effect such as "Dogoon" is output, and the voice of the narration is not output. In the situations of (A-14) to (A-16), a sound effect such as "Dogoon" is output, and the voice of the narration is not output. In the situations of (A-17) to (A-19), a sound effect such as "Piki" is output, and the voice of the narration such as "Mumu VS Bakuchu" is output. Here, if we look at the relationship between the voice of the narration and the sound effects, at the timing of (A-19), the sound effects output from (A-17) continue to be output, but the volume decreases. The sound effects are designed to be output so that they are prioritized over the sound effects (in this example, the volume of the sound effects is set to be louder for the sound effects of the narration). In this way, at the timing when the display of the characters "Mumu VS Bakuchu" starts (timing of (A-8)), the sound effects of the narration are not output, but sound effects that match the animation of the characters are output. After that, at the timing when the display of the characters "Mumu VS Bakuchu" reaches a fixed size and position that is easy for the player to recognize (timing of (A-19)), the sound effects of the narration are output. For character displays such as the dialogue subtitles described above, the size and display position are not changed, so the player can easily recognize the content of the character display, and the dialogue sound is output at the same timing as the start of the character display, so the information on the character display and the dialogue sound can be provided without any sense of incongruity, but for character displays that are displayed while changing the size and display position, such as the title displays shown in Figures 178 (A-8) to (A-19), the player has difficulty recognizing the content of the character display at the start of the character display, and if the dialogue sound is output at the same timing as the start of the character display, the player may not be able to recognize the content of the sound because he or she is unable to recognize the content of the character display. In consideration of this, in this gaming machine, for character displays that are displayed while changing the size and display position, the dialogue sound is not output at the start of the character display, but instead, an SE sound is output to liven up the period until the time when the character display is easier for the player to recognize. The device is designed to output the narration audio at the timing when the text display is displayed in a fixed size and position (timing (A-19)), thereby providing information on the text display and the dialogue audio without creating a sense of incongruity.

(About reach title text display)
The above-mentioned reach title character display will be described in more detail. In the series of flows in FIG. 178 (A-8) to (A-16), the character displays "Mumu", "VS", and "Bakuchu", which constitute the character display of "Mumu VS Bakuchu" that is finally displayed, are displayed enlarged and framed out. This corresponds to displaying in stages. Also, in the flows in FIG. 178 (A-17) and (A-18), the character display of "Mumu VS Bakuchu" is displayed with an effect. The effect imitates a display that diffuses light. At the timing of (A-18), the effect gives the surface of the character display an effect of diffusing light, so it is a timing at which the characters "Mumu VS Bakuchu" are difficult for the player to recognize, and at the timing of (A-19), the effect begins to wear off, so it is a timing at which the characters "Mumu VS Bakuchu" can be recognized by the player, and it can be said that this is a timing with better visibility than (A-18).

(Timing of jackpot name display and audio output)
Next, the timing of the big win name character display and the voice output will be described in detail with reference to Figures 228 to 231. The period during which the big win name is displayed is the same as the fanfare period, as described above.

(Powerful Bonus display flow)
FIG. 228 shows details of the dialogue output location of the Powerful Bonus notification scene in FIGS. 144 to 146 and 166 to 168. The flow will be explained below. As in (12-0) and (12-0'), an effect display (an effect display imagining an explosion) is displayed in which a flame moves from the back of the liquid crystal display device to the front. As in (12-1), the word Powerful is displayed together with a flame effect display, and as in (12-2), the word Powerful shrinks and the flame effect changes to a display of sparks scattering. As in (12-3), the word Bonus is displayed together with a flame effect display, and as in (12-4), the word Bonus shrinks and the flame effect changes to a display of sparks scattering. As shown in (12-5), the word "POWERFUL BONUS" is displayed with a flame effect, and as shown in (12-6), the word "POWERFUL BONUS" shrinks and the flame effect changes to one that looks like sparks are flying. After that, as shown in (12-7) and (12-8), an arrow with the words "Right Hit" and attached letters is displayed and frames in from the left side of the liquid crystal display so as to be superimposed on the word "POWERFUL BONUS". As shown in (12-9) to (12-12), the arrow is displayed so that it alternates between right and left.

(Time chart of various sounds in the Powerful Bonus notification scene)
FIG. 230 is a time chart of the Powerful Bonus notification scene shown in FIG. 228. The elements that make up the time chart are "dialogue sound,""soundeffects," and "background music.""Dialoguesound" refers to the sound that is emitted during the big win name display scene (fanfare period). "Sound effects" refers to sound effects used to emphasize the scene. "BGM" refers to the background sound that colors the scene.

(Timing of jackpot name display and audio output)
Referring to the time chart of FIG. 230, in the scenes of FIG. 228 (12-0) and (12-0'), a sound effect is output. The sound effect at this time is a "boom" sound that represents an explosion. The same sound effect is output in the scenes of (12-1) and (12-2) where "Powerful" is displayed, (12-3) and (12-4) where "BONUS" is displayed, and (12-5) and (12-6) where "Powerful BONUS" is displayed. In the scene of (12-6), the sound effect is output, but the volume is gradually decreased, and a sound such as "Powerful BONUS" is output in the voice of "mumu". After that, in the scenes of (12-7) to (12-12), a sound effect is output. The sound effect at this time is a "whoosh, whoosh" sound that represents wind blowing. In scene (12-8), since the player is now able to see the words "hit right," a sound such as "hit right" is output in Mumu's voice. BGM continues to be output from (12-0) to (12-11). Thus, at the timing when the words "POWERFUL BONUS" start to be displayed (timing (12-1)), Mumu's voice is not output, and instead, a sound effect is output that matches the animation of the word display. After that, at the timing when the words "POWERFUL BONUS" are displayed at a fixed size and position that are easy for the player to recognize (timing (12-6)), Mumu's voice is output. For character displays such as the dialogue subtitles described above, the size and display position are not changed, so the player can easily recognize the content of the character display, and the dialogue sound is output at the same timing as the start of the character display, so the information on the character display and the dialogue sound can be provided without any sense of incongruity, but for character displays that are displayed while changing the size and display position, such as the jackpot name display shown in Figure 228 (12-0) to (12-6), the player has difficulty recognizing the content of the character display at the start of the character display, and if the dialogue sound is output at the same timing as the start of the character display, the player may not be able to recognize the content of the sound because he or she cannot recognize the content of the character display. In consideration of this, in this gaming machine, for character displays that are displayed while changing the size and display position, the dialogue sound is not output at the start of the character display, but instead, an SE sound is output to liven up the period until the time when the character display is easy for the player to recognize. The system is designed so that the information on the character display and the sound of the dialogue are given without any sense of incongruity by outputting the sound of the narration at the timing (12-6) when the character display is displayed at a fixed size and position.

(About the display of the jackpot name)
The above-mentioned character display of "POWERFUL BONUS" will now be described in further detail. In the series of flows shown in Fig. 228 (12-0) to (12-6), the character displays of "POWERFUL" and "BONUS", which constitute the character display of "POWERFUL BONUS" that is finally displayed, are displayed in a reduced size and framed out. This corresponds to displaying in stages. Also, in the flow shown in Fig. 228 (12-5) and (12-6), the character display of "POWERFUL BONUS" is displayed with an effect. The effect is a display that looks like flames are coming towards you. At timing (12-5), the effect makes it look like flames are spreading across the surface of the character display, making it difficult for the player to see the word "POWERFUL BONUS." At timing (12-6), the effect begins to subside and the effect display changes to one that looks like sparks are flying, making the word "POWERFUL BONUS" recognizable to the player. Compared to timing (12-5), this can be said to be a timing with better visibility.

(Super Powerful BONUS display flow)
FIG. 229 shows details of the dialogue output location of the super powerful BONUS notification scene of FIGS. 166, 169, and 170. The flow will be explained below. As in (12-0) and (12-0'), an effect display (an effect display imagining an explosion) is displayed in which flames move from the back of the liquid crystal display device to the front. As in (12'-1), the word "super" is displayed together with a flame effect display, and as in (12'-2), the word "super" shrinks and the flame effect also changes to a display of sparks scattering. As in (12'-3), the word "powerful" is displayed together with a flame effect display, and as in (12'-4), the word "powerful" shrinks and the flame effect also changes to a display of sparks scattering. As shown in (12'-5), the word BONUS is displayed with a flame effect, and as shown in (12'-6), the word BONUS shrinks and the flame effect changes to one that looks like sparks are scattering. As shown in (12'-7), the word SUPER POWERFUL BONUS is displayed with a flame effect, and as shown in (12'-8), the word SUPER POWERFUL BONUS shrinks and the flame effect changes to one that looks like sparks are scattering. After that, as shown in (12'-9) and (12'-10), an arrow with the words "Right Hit" and attached characters is displayed and frames in from the left side of the liquid crystal display device so as to be superimposed on the word POWERFUL BONUS. As shown in (12'-11) to (12'-14), the arrow is displayed so as to alternate between right and left.

(Time chart of various sounds in the Super Powerful BONUS announcement scene)
FIG. 231 is a time chart of the Super Powerful Bonus notification scene shown in FIG. 229. The elements that make up the time chart are "dialogue sound,""soundeffects," and "background music.""Dialoguesound" refers to the sound that is emitted during the big win name display scene (fanfare period). "Sound effects" refers to sound effects used to emphasize the scene. "BGM" refers to the background sound that colors the scene.

(Timing of jackpot name display and audio output)
Referring to the time chart of FIG. 231, in the scenes of FIG. 229 (12-0) and (12-0'), a sound effect is output. The sound effect at this time is a sound such as "boom" that represents an explosion. The same sound effect is output in the scenes of (12'-1) and (12'-2) where "super" is displayed, (12'-3) and (12'-4) where "powerful" is displayed, (12'-5) and (12'-6) where "bonus" is displayed, and (12'-7) and (12'-8) where "super powerful bonus" is displayed. In the scene of (12'-8), the sound effect is output, but the volume is gradually decreased, and a sound such as "super powerful bonus" is output in the voice of Mumu. After that, in the scenes of (12'-9) to (12'-14), a sound effect is output. The sound effect at this time is a sound such as "whoosh, whoosh" that represents the wind blowing. In scene (12'-10), since this is the timing when the player is able to see the words "hit right," a sound such as "hit right" is output in Mumu's voice. BGM continues to be output from (12-0) to (12'-13). Thus, at the timing when the words "SUPER POWERFUL BONUS" start to be displayed (timing (12'-1)), Mumu's voice is not output, and a sound effect is output that matches the animation of the word display. After that, at the timing when the words "SUPER POWERFUL BONUS" are displayed at a fixed size and position that are easy for the player to recognize (timing (12'-8)), Mumu's voice is output. For character displays such as the dialogue subtitles mentioned above, the size and display position are not changed, so the player can easily recognize the content of the character display, and the dialogue sound is output at the same timing as the start of the character display, so the information on the character display and the dialogue sound can be provided without any sense of incongruity, but for character displays that are displayed while changing the size and display position, such as the jackpot name display shown in Figure 229 (12-0) to (12'-8), the player has difficulty recognizing the content of the character display at the start of the character display, and if the dialogue sound is output at the same timing as the start of the character display, the player may not be able to recognize the content of the sound because he or she cannot recognize the content of the character display. In consideration of this, in this gaming machine, for character displays that are displayed while changing the size and display position, the dialogue sound is not output at the start of the character display, but instead, an SE sound is output to liven up the period until the time when the character display becomes easy for the player to recognize. The device is designed to output the narration audio at the timing when the text display is displayed at a fixed size and position (timing (12'-8)), thereby providing information on the text display and the dialogue audio without creating a sense of incongruity.

(About the display of the jackpot name)
The above-mentioned "Super Powerful Bonus" text display will now be described in more detail. In the sequence of events shown in Fig. 229 (12-0) to (12'-8), the text displays "Super", "Powerful", and "BONUS" that make up the "Super Powerful Bonus" text display that is finally displayed are displayed in a reduced size and framed out. This corresponds to displaying in stages. Also, in the sequence shown in Fig. 229 (12'-7) and (12'-8), the "Super Powerful Bonus" text display is displayed with an effect. The effect is a display that looks like flames are coming towards you. At timing (12'-7), the effect makes it look like flames are spreading across the surface of the character display, making it difficult for the player to see the characters "SUPER POWERFUL BONUS." At timing (12'-8), the effect begins to subside and the effect display changes to one that looks like sparks are flying, making the characters "SUPER POWERFUL BONUS" recognizable to the player. Compared to timing (12'-7), this is a timing with better visibility.

(The relationship between the voice output of "Powerful Bonus", "Right Hit", and "Aim for V" and the characters drawn on the gaming machine)
Using Figures 232 to 235, the relationship between the sound output such as "POWERFUL BONUS", "Right Hit", and "Aim for V" and the light emission of the lamp of the character drawn on the gaming machine will be described. In Figures 232, 233, and 235, when the lamp is lit, the corresponding part of the lamp on the drawing and the surrounding part are not filled in, and when the lamp is turned off, the corresponding part of the lamp on the drawing and the surrounding part are filled in. In addition, in order to express the strength of light, the light emission pattern of the lamps 9a, 9b, and 9d provided on the gaming machine frame in Figure 233 is expressed as the darkly filled part being turned off, the lightly filled part being turned on (weak brightness), and the unfilled part being turned on (strong brightness). As shown in Figure 1, a character decoration 102 is provided in the lower right area of the gaming board 2. A character decoration 103 is provided in the left side area of the gaming board 2. A character decoration 101 is provided in the upper right area of the gaming machine frame 3. The character decoration 101 depicts Mumu, the main character of the content of the gaming machine. A character decoration lamp 9g is provided behind the character decoration 101, and when this lamp emits light, the character decoration 101 is illuminated, making it possible to make it stand out. The character decoration 101 is a non-movable decoration that does not move, but since it protrudes, it plays a role in appealing to players who are not playing the game that this is a gaming machine in which Mumu appears. The character decoration 102 depicts Mumu, the main character of the content of the gaming machine. An attacca lamp 9c is provided behind the character decoration 102, and when this lamp emits light, the character decoration 102 is illuminated, making it possible to make it stand out. The character decoration 103 depicts Bakuchu, the enemy character of the content of the gaming machine. A decoration lamp 9f is provided behind the character decoration 103, and when this lamp emits light, the character decoration 103 is illuminated, making it possible to make it stand out. As described above, characters are drawn on the game board and the game machine frame, and lamps are provided near the characters.

(Relationship between the voice output of "Powerful Bonus" and the characters drawn on the gaming machine)
FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining in detail the illumination of the lamps provided on the game board and the game machine frame in the flow of displaying the name of POWERFUL BONUS during the fanfare period described in FIG. 228. As shown in (12-1), when "POWERFUL" is displayed, all the lamps 9a to 9g provided on the game board and the game machine frame are turned off, and as shown in (12-2), when "POWERFUL" is reduced, all the lamps 9a to 9g provided on the game board and the game machine frame are turned on. As shown in (12-3), when "BONUS" is displayed, all the lamps 9a to 9g provided on the game board and the game machine frame are turned off, and as shown in (12-4), when "BONUS" is reduced, all the lamps 9a to 9g provided on the game board and the game machine frame are turned on. As shown in (12-5), when "POWERFUL BONUS" is displayed, all of the lamps 9a to 9g provided on the game board and the game machine frame are turned off. Here, (12-6) and onwards are written as (12-6') and (12-6''), which indicate the interval between (12-6) and (12-7) and are prepared to explain the transition of the lamps in more detail. As shown in (12-6), when "POWERFUL BONUS" is reduced, 9c and 9g are turned on and the other lamps are turned off. After that, in (12-6'), all of the lamps including 9c and 9g are turned off, and in (12-6''), 9c and 9g are turned on and the other lamps are turned off. In this way, in the scenes ((12-1) to (12-4)) in which "Powerful" and "BONUS" constituting "Powerful Bonus" are displayed, the lights are all turned off and all turned on in sync with the SE sound. In the scene in which "Powerful Bonus" is displayed, it is not displayed at the fixed size and position, and the effect display has not been fully used up (12-5), the lights are all turned off. In the situation (12-6) in which the fixed size, fixed position, and effect display have been fully used up, the lights are turned on in the game machine frame and game board. The lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) are turned on, and the other lamps (9a, 9b, 9d to 9f) are turned off, and in the situation (12-6'), all of the lamps are turned off, and in the situation (12-6''), again, the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board are turned on, and the other lamps (9a, 9b, 9d to 9f) are turned off. This corresponds to the above-mentioned (12-6) situation in which "POWERFUL BONUS" is output in the voice of Mumu, and is designed to make the characters depicted on the game machine frame and game board appear to be speaking by making the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the game machine frame and game board flash and turning off the other lamps, thereby highlighting the Mumu decoration on the game machine frame and game board. In the left area of the game board 2, a Bakuchu decoration is provided as the character decoration 103, but in all of the situations (12-6), (12-6'), and (12-6''), the lamp 9f provided near the Bakuchu decoration remains turned off. This is to prevent the player from mistaking the "POWERFUL BONUS" sound for the Bakuchu sound, since the sound is output in the voice of Mumu in the (12-6) situation.

(Relationship between the sound output of "right hit" and the character drawn on the gaming machine)
FIG. 233 is a diagram for explaining in detail the illumination of the lamps provided on the game board and the game machine frame in the flow of promoting right hit during the fanfare period described in FIG. 228. First, the transition of the lamps 9a, 9b, and 9d provided on the game machine frame will be explained. In the flow from (12-7) to (12-12'), the lamps 9a, 9b, and 9d are illuminated in an illumination pattern to promote the player to hit right. Specifically, as shown in (12-7), the lamps from the lower part of the left side (9b) of the game machine frame to the lamps around the middle are turned on (high brightness) and turned on (low brightness), and the upper lamps, the lamp of 9a, and the lamps on the right side (9b) of the game machine frame are all turned off. Then, the illuminated (low brightness) and illuminated (high brightness) illumination points are illuminated in the order of (12-8), (12-9), and (12-9') so that they move in a circle in a clockwise direction. (12-10) is the same lighting mode as (12-7), and thereafter, the lighting is switched with the same rhythm up to (12-12'). In this way, the lighting points of the lamps 9a, 9b, and 9d provided on the gaming machine frame move clockwise to suggest to the player that the player is hitting to the right, making it appear as if the lamps are moving further and further to the right. Next, the transition of the lighting of the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g), including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decoration 101, 102) on the gaming machine frame and the gaming board, will be explained. As shown in (12-7), the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g), including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decoration 101, 102) on the gaming machine frame and the gaming board, are turned off. After that, as in (12-8), the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) on the game machine frame and the game board are turned on, and the other lamps (9c, 9e, 9f) remain turned off. In (12-9), the remaining lamps (9c, 9e-9g), including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) on the game machine frame and the game board, are turned off again, and in (12-9'), the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) on the game machine frame and the game board are turned on, and the other lamps (9c, 9e, 9f) remain turned off. Thereafter, in (12-10) to (12-12'), the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g), including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the gaming machine frame and the gaming board, are turned off.
This corresponds to the voice of Mumu saying "hit right" in the situation (12-8) as described above, and is designed to make the character depicted on the game machine frame and game board appear to be speaking by making the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the game machine frame and game board flash and turning off the other lamps, thereby highlighting the Mumu decoration on the game machine frame and game board. In the left area of the game board 2, a Bakuchu decoration is provided as the character decoration 103, but in all situations (12-8), (12-9), and (12-9'), the lamp 9f provided near the Bakuchu decoration remains turned off. This is to prevent the player from mistaking the voice of Bakuchu for the voice of Bakuchu, since the voice of Mumu is output as the voice of "hit right" in the situation (12-8).

(Flow during the jackpot round)
FIG. 234 shows the details of the scene during the big win round in FIG. 147 and FIG. 171. The flow will be explained below. (13-1) is the scene of the first round. After that, as in (13-1) to (13-7), a notification to aim at V is given to make the player aim at a specific area (V) in the attacker. This notification to aim at V starts at the timing of (13-2). The timing of (13-2) is after the first round ends, and is the period until the second round starts (the so-called interval period). As in (13-2) to (13-5), an image using this gaming machine is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and the image progresses as if an arrow were moving from the lower left to the lower right, and finally, as in (13-5), the vicinity of the attacker with the specific area is emphasized, and as in (13-6), the image of the vicinity of the attacker with the specific area is enlarged. After that, as shown in (13-7), the text "Aim for V" is displayed, and a voice saying "Aim for V" is output in the voice of Mumu.

(Relationship between the voice output of "Aim for V" and the character drawn on the gaming machine)
FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining in detail the light emission of the lamps provided on the game board and the game machine frame in the flow of promoting right-hand hit during the fanfare period described in FIG. 234. First, the transition of the lamps 9a, 9b, and 9d provided on the game machine frame is omitted because the light emission is the same as that in FIG. 233 described above. In FIG. 235, there are (13-6'), (13-7'), (13-7'', and (13-7'''), which are provided to show the transition of the lamps between scenes, as for the reason described above. Next, the transition of the light emission of the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g), including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decoration 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board, will be explained. As shown in (13-2) to (13-5), the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g) including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board are turned off. Then, as shown in (13-6), at the timing when the image of the vicinity of the attacker with the specific area is highlighted on the liquid crystal display device, the lamp 9c provided near the Mumu decoration (character decoration 102) drawn on the game board is turned on, and the remaining lamps (9e to 9g) including the lamp 9g provided near the Mumu decoration (character decoration 101) drawn on the game machine frame remain turned off. Thereafter, in (13-6'), the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g), including the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board, are turned off, and in (13-7), the lamps (9c, 9g) provided near the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board are turned on, while the other lamps (9c, 9e, 9f) remain turned off, and in (13-7'), the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board are turned on. The remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g) including lamps (9c, 9g) provided in the vicinity of 2) are turned off, and at (13-7''), the lamps (9c, 9g) provided in the vicinity of the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board are turned on, while the other lamps (9c, 9e, 9f) remain in the turned off state, and at (13-7'''), the remaining lamps (9c, 9e to 9g) including lamps (9c, 9g) provided in the vicinity of the Mumu decoration (character decorations 101, 102) drawn on the game machine frame and the game board are turned off.
This corresponds to the voice of Mumu saying "Aim for V" being output in the situation (13-7) as described above, and is designed to make the character depicted on the game machine frame and game board appear to be speaking by making the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the game machine frame and game board flash and turning off the other lamps, thereby highlighting the Mumu decoration on the game machine frame and game board. In the left area of the game board 2, a Bakuchu decoration is provided as the character decoration 103, but in all situations (13-7), (13-7'), (13-7''), and (13-7'''), the lamp 9f provided near the Bakuchu decoration remains turned off. This is to prevent the voice of Mumu from mistaking it for the Bakuchu voice in the situation (13-7).

In Figures 232 to 235, the lighting pattern for emphasizing the character decoration is described as blinking, but it is not limited to blinking. It is also possible to use lighting patterns such as making the lamp brighter than the other lamps, or making the lamp emit a different color than the other lamps (the other lamps emit white, but the area around the character decoration emits a color other than white, such as red).

In Figures 232 to 235, the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the gaming machine frame and the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the gaming board are illuminated in the same illumination mode, but they may be illuminated in different illumination modes. For example, it may be possible to apply illumination modes such as making the blinking cycle different, or making the blinking cycle the same but emitting different colors. In particular, when making the "Aim for V" notification, it is better to make the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the gaming board more noticeable than the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the gaming machine frame, so it is preferable to make the illumination mode of the lamps near the Mumu decoration on the gaming board more emphasized (high brightness, shorter blinking cycle interval for more intense illumination).

(Modifications)
Modifications of this embodiment will be described below. Modifications include cases where more detailed effects are added and cases where the effects described so far are replaced.

(About rims)
One of the characters described in FIG. 172 is a character called "Rimu". This character "Rimu" is positioned as a premium character in this gaming machine. A premium character is a character whose appearance determines a big win. The gaming machine is designed so that when a big win variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern, there is a possibility that the character will appear, and when a loss variation pattern is selected, there is no possibility that the character will appear. Using FIG. 236, a performance in which Rim appears will be described. Here, an example in which Rim appears will be described as the last step of the button step-up performance of the variation example 2 in the high base described in FIG. 150 and FIG. 151. After the button performance is executed in FIG. 236 (15-6), there are two reaction patterns: a pattern in which the button step-up performance of Mumu described above is executed, as shown in (15-7) to (15-9), and a pattern in which a cut-in of Rim is displayed, as shown in (15-7') to (15-9'). Here, in the button step-up performance of Mumu in (15-7) to (15-9), as described above, Mumu's mouth opens and closes dynamically. In contrast, in the pattern in which Rimu's cut-in is displayed, a voice such as "Congratulations!" is output as Rimu's voice, but the mouth of Rimu's cut-in display is statically displayed. This is because premium characters such as Rimu do not appear often, and there is a low possibility that players will pay attention to their mouths, so they are statically displayed, while characters such as Mumu, which are used both in winning and losing, are displayed in a mixture of dynamic and static displays to attract players. Also, a cut-in performance as shown in FIG. 237 may be provided. In this case, Rimu may appear in multiple performances by designing the mouth of the cut-in display of Rimu to be static, and the above effect will be achieved in any of the performances.

(Comparison of low base and high base reach)
In the present embodiment described so far, when the decorative symbol becomes a reach state in the high base fluctuation, the display of "REACH" and the voice of "REACH" are not output. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 238 (14-17'), even when the decorative symbol becomes a reach state in the high base fluctuation, the display of "REACH" may be performed and the voice of "REACH" may be output (hereinafter, also referred to as a reach-time display voice pattern). The display of "REACH" may be the same as that of (1-8) or may be a different display (display with different font or size). The voice of "REACH" may be the same as that of (1-8) or may be a different voice (the same character is uttered in a different expression, a different character voice).

(Average fluctuation time when comparing low base and high base reach)
As described above, when a pattern with a display sound when reaching is installed in the variation of a high base, it is preferable to make the following allocation in consideration of the relationship with the low base. First, the average fluctuation time is described as a comparison between the low base and the high base. As can be seen from Figures 12-1 and 12-2, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern of the high base is set shorter than the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern of the low base. In addition, since the allocation of random numbers used for the reach judgment in Figure 10 is common to the low base and the high base, it is designed so that the average fluctuation time is shorter for the high base than for the low base. This is because the starting condition is more likely to be established in the high base state, so that the game is quickly digested and the player is not dissatisfied. In consideration of this average fluctuation time, it is preferable to make the rate at which the pattern with a display sound when reaching is executed higher for the low base than for the high base. Since the average fluctuation time is short in the high base, the timing when the decorative symbols become reach may be designed to be as short as possible, and in that case, if the reach display and sound pattern is used frequently, the player may miss the display of "REACH". Therefore, in the low base, the reach display and sound pattern is used frequently to allow time to be taken, and the reach is recognized by displays and sounds other than the decorative symbols, and in the high base, it is important to consume it quickly, and the reach display and sound pattern is executed less, so that the optimal reach can be provided in both states. As a specific example of the ratio, the reach display and sound pattern is executed in 80% of the reach in the low base, and the reach display and sound pattern is executed in 20% of the reach in the high base. It may not be executed in the high base, and it may be executed 100% in the low base.

(Comparison with low base reach)
In the present embodiment described so far, when the decorative pattern is in a reach state at a low base, as in FIG. 239(1-8) (same as (1-8) in FIG. 173(1-8) etc.), the word "REACH" is displayed, but a pattern as in FIG. 239(1-8') may be added. FIG. 239(1-8') is different from (1-8) in that the sound "REACH" is output as the sound of mumu as in (1-8), and the display displayed in front of the decorative pattern is not the word "REACH" but "mumu". This display of "mumu" is more conspicuous than the word display such as "REACH". Specifically, the display of "mumu" is larger in size than the word display of "REACH" and uses more of the display area, and the word display of "REACH" is not surrounded by effects, but the display of "mumu" is surrounded by effects, which correspond to conspicuous elements. As for the design of the jackpot expectation of (1-8) and (1-8'), it is preferable to design (1-8') to have a higher jackpot expectation than (1-8). Although the voice output is the same as in (1-8) and (1-8'), patterns with different display contents are prepared, and in particular, the display contents are prepared in a pattern in which the same as the voice is displayed as a text display ("REACH") and a pattern in which no text display is made and a special display is made using a character, and the pattern in which the text display is displayed makes the player clearly recognize that it is "REACH" through the voice and text display, while the pattern in which the special display is made recognize that it is "REACH" through the voice, but the display has different contents to attract interest, and the two can have different roles, and further, since the special display has a higher expectation, it can be made a game in which the player focuses on whether or not the special display is executed.

(Performance during the period from when the reach occurs until the SP reach is executed)
From here, using Figs. 240 to 242, modified examples of the effects during the period from when the decorative symbols become ready to play until the SP ready to play is executed will be described. In the present embodiment described so far, after the decorative symbols become ready to play, as in Fig. 174 (1-35) if the base is low, or as in Figs. 187 (14-17) (14-18) if the base is high, the SP ready to play according to the base state is executed, or the chance of consecutive hits as in Figs. 177 and 189 is executed, and the SP ready to play according to the base state is executed. In this modified example, additional explanations will be given of the effect patterns executed during the period from when the decorative symbols become ready to play until the SP ready to play is executed. The patterns 1 to 4 described below are patterns in which the decorative symbols become ready to play as in Fig. 174 (1-35), a display such as "REACH" is displayed, the sound "REACH" is output as a mumu sound, and then the effect according to the pattern is executed, and as in (A-1), the SP ready to play A is started, and are examples of variations during a low base. In patterns 5 and 6, as shown in FIG. 187 (14-17), after the decorative pattern reaches a reach state, a performance according to the pattern is executed, and an SP reach C starts as shown in (C-1).

(Period from when the reach is reached to when the SP reach is executed: Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is a presentation in which the background and decorative symbols in the reach state become difficult to see as shown in Fig. 240 (5-1), and the screen goes black. No character voice is output, and no new text is displayed.

(Period from when the reach is reached to when the SP reach is executed: Pattern 2)
In pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 240 (4-1), in a layer that takes priority over the decorative symbols that have reached a reach state, a word "press" is displayed to encourage button operation, along with a button display, and Mumu's voice is output saying "press." After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (6-1), a cut-in display of Mumu is shown as a reaction to the button operation. The cut-in display of Mumu is accompanied by a word display saying "Let's do our best!", and Mumu's voice is output saying "Let's do our best!" Pattern 2 is a display in which a character's voice is output, and words corresponding to the voice are displayed.

(Period from when the reach is reached to when the SP reach is executed: Pattern 3)
In pattern 3, the reel falls as shown in Fig. 240 (7-1). The image on the liquid crystal display device is an image of butterfly-shaped ripples of different sizes that expand sequentially in a manner that emphasizes the falling of the reel. Mumu's voice is output saying, "I'm going to go all out." Pattern 3 is a presentation in which the voice of a character is output and a different display is made from the text corresponding to the voice.

(Period from when the reach is reached until the SP reach is executed: Pattern 4)
In pattern 4, as shown in Fig. 240 (8-1), a full-screen cut-in of Mumu is displayed. In pattern 3, no voice of the character is output, and no new text is displayed.

(Period from when the reach is reached to when the SP reach is executed: Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is a presentation in which the background and decorative symbols in the reach state become difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 241 (14-17'), and the screen goes black. No voice of the character is output, and no new text is displayed.

(Period from when the reach is reached until the SP reach is executed: Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is an effect in which, as shown in Figure 241 (14-18), text such as "Development" is displayed and Mumu's voice is output saying "Here we go." This is an effect in which the character's voice is output and no new text is displayed.

In this way, by having multiple presentation patterns for the period from when a reach occurs until an SP reach is executed at both the low base and high base, a variety of presentations can be shown to the player, attracting the player to this gaming machine.

(Execution period of patterns 1 to 4 and execution period of patterns 5 and 6)
FIG. 242 is a diagram for comparing the execution periods of patterns 1 to 4 and patterns 5 and 6. As described above, patterns 1 to 4 are executed on a low base, and patterns 5 and 6 are executed on a high base. As shown in FIG. 242, patterns 1 to 4 are set to have a longer execution period than patterns 5 and 6. This is because, as described above, a high base is a state in which it is desirable to consume more quickly than a low base, so the period from when the decorative pattern becomes a reach state until the SP reach is executed is designed to be shorter for a high base.

(Percentage of each pattern executed)
The execution rate of each pattern is as shown in FIG. 243. When a variation pattern that executes any one of patterns 1 to 4 is selected as a variation pattern of a low base, and a variation pattern that executes any one of patterns 5 and 6 is selected as a variation pattern of a high base, it can be seen that the execution rate of pattern 5 is high. When considering patterns 1 to 4 in combination with the cases of big wins and misses, all patterns are executed equally. In patterns 2, 3, and 6, the voice of the character is output, and in patterns 1, 4, and 5, the voice of the character is not output. In summary, the period from when the decorative pattern in the low base becomes a reach state to when the SP reach is executed is more likely to output the voice of the character than the period from when the decorative pattern in the high base becomes a reach state to when the SP reach is executed. As mentioned above, this is because a high base is a state in which it is desirable to have the reels consumed more quickly than a low base, and so the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a reach state until the SP reach is executed is designed to be shorter on a high base.Therefore, on a low base, the appeal of this gaming machine is brought out by the output of character voices, and on a high base, the focus is on allowing the reels to be consumed quickly, which means that character voices are output more often, preventing dissatisfaction on the part of the player, such as not being able to understand the content of the voices being output.Taking both states into consideration, the design is suitable for both states.

(Expected jackpot for each pattern)
The expected degree of each pattern is as follows according to the distribution in FIG. 243. At a low base, the order is pattern 4>pattern 3>pattern 2>pattern 1, and at a high base, the order is pattern 6>pattern 5.

From here on, we will explain two variations of the effects that can be performed during the fluctuations leading up to the SP reach.

(POWERFULZONE, HYPERPOWERFULZONE)
FIG. 244 is a diagram for explaining POWERZONE (hereinafter also referred to as PZ), and FIG. 245 to FIG. 247 are diagrams for explaining HYPERPOWERZONE (hereinafter also referred to as HPZ). After the fluctuation of both PZ and HPZ starts, the decorative pattern This is a performance that can be executed before the reach state is reached. The decorative pattern is in the reach state from the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation example 1 at the low base and the fluctuation example 2 at the low base described in Figures 101 to 105 and Figures 106 to 110. It is possible to execute it in the period until it becomes. The probability of a big hit is higher when HPZ is executed than when PZ is executed. When PZ or HPZ is executed, the probability of a big hit is higher when PZ or HPZ is executed in the subsequent fluctuations. A telop is displayed to indicate that the SP Reach (SP Reach A, SP Reach B, Story Reach) has been executed. HPZ is designed to have more telops than PZ. This telop is displayed when the SP Reach (SP Reach A, SP Reach B, Story Reach) has been executed. The display will end when the In addition, PZ and HPZ are also called zone-type effects.

(POWERFULZONE)
The flow of the PZ presentation and sound output will be explained using Figure 248. As in (Z1-3), when the decorative pattern is fluctuating, a tease is generated as to whether the POWERZONE icon will be completed or not. As shown in (Z1-4), the PZ entry is notified when the POWERZONE icon is completed in the center of the display area. The POWERZONE caption is displayed at the end, and the voice "POWERZONE" is output in the voice of Mumu. After that, the POWERZONE icon expands as shown in (Z1-5). The display fades out as the POWERZONE icon is turned off, as shown in (Z1-6).

(HYPERPOWER FULZONE)
The flow of the HPZ presentation and sound output will be explained using Figures 248 and 249. In a situation where the decorative pattern is changing, such as in (Z2-3), the explosion uses the entire display area. An image is displayed as if something had happened, and the scene changes. In the scene after the change, Mumu is displayed as in (Z2-4), and Mumu opens her eyes as in (Z2-5). Then, ( As shown in (Z2-6), the entire display area goes dark, and as shown in (Z2-7) to (Z2-25), the characters that make up the HYPERPOWERZONE are displayed one by one in a switching manner. ) the words HYPERPOWERZONE are displayed to notify you that you are entering the HPZ. This notification is composed of two elements: the word HYPERPOWERZONE is displayed, and the voice "HYPER POWERZONE" is output in the voice of Mumu. After that, as in (Z2-27), the word HYPERPOWERZONE is The screen switches to a low-pitched background with subtitles.

(Expectations for POWERZONE and HYPERPOWERZONE)
It is preferable to design the jackpot expectation rate of PZ and HPZ as follows.
Fluctuations in which an SP reach is executed without executing PZ or HPZ (fluctuations shown in Figures 101 to 105, and fluctuations shown in Figures 106 to 110) < fluctuations in which a PZ is executed and an SP reach is executed < fluctuations in which an HPZ is executed and an SP reach is executed. In this way, by designing the fluctuations in which a PZ or HPZ is executed to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than fluctuations in which a PZ and HPZ are not executed, and the fluctuations in which an HPZ is executed to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than fluctuations in which a PZ is executed, it is possible to create expectations that a PZ or HPZ will be executed, and further to have the effect of drawing attention to whether or not an HPZ will be executed.

(About the audio output period of REACH, POWERZONE, and HYPERPOWERZONE)
The audio output periods of REACH, POWERZONE, and HYPERPOWERZONE are preferably designed as follows.
Output period of Mumu's voice such as "REACH" in Fig. 173 (1-8): 0.5 seconds < Output period of Mumu's voice such as "POWER FULL ZONE" in Fig. 248 (Z1-4): 1 second < Output period of Mumu's voice such as "HYPER POWERFUL ZONE" in Fig. 249 (Z2-27): 3 seconds. By using such a design, coupled with the above-mentioned design of expectation, the expectation and the length of the output period are linked, and the effect is achieved of increasing the excitement during the period when the performance with high expectation is being executed.

(Regarding the use of mumu in fluctuations where POWERZONE and HYPERPOWERZONE are executed and where they are not executed)
The use of mumu in fluctuations in which POWERZONE and HYPERPOWERZONE are executed and fluctuations in which they are not executed may be designed as follows. In the explanation of Figures 244 to 249, the flow after entering the PZ or HPZ is the same as the other fluctuations described above, but the flow until the SP reach is executed may be different between fluctuations in which the SP reach is executed by entering the PZ or HPZ and fluctuations in which the SP reach is executed without entering the PZ or HPZ. More specifically, in a variation in which an SP reach is executed without entering a PZ or HPZ, a sound such as "REACH" is output in Mumu's voice, but in the period leading up to the SP reach, Mumu is not displayed at all (for example, no conversation announcement or chance to rapidly press after the reach is executed), so that Mumu is displayed only in the SP reach, and in a variation in which a PZ or HPZ is entered and an SP reach is executed, a sound such as "POWER ZONE" or "HYPER POWER ZONE" is output in Mumu's voice, and Mumu is always displayed in the period leading up to the SP reach (for example, either a conversation announcement or a chance to rapidly press after the reach is always executed), creating a situation in which Mumu is displayed before the SP reach. By designing it in this way, combined with the expectation design described above, in cases of high expectation fluctuations, the sound of the high expectation performance (PZ, HPZ) being announced is output as a Mumu sound, after which some form of Mumu is displayed, followed by the display of Mumu in the event of an SP reach, creating a flow where everything is concentrated into Mumu. As a target, in cases where PZ or HPZ is not executed, by not displaying Mumu in the period until the SP reach is executed, it is possible to create a fluctuation with a relatively high expectation, thereby achieving the effect of increasing excitement for the period in which the high expectation performance is being executed.

From here on, we will explain the difference in expectation level depending on the type of presentation, and the normal type presentation and the chance-up type presentation.

(Increased chance of receiving the SP Reach title)
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the scene in FIG. 179 (A-19) where the title is announced. FIG. 250 (A-19a) is the same as FIG. 179 (A-19), and is a pattern where the display of Mumu VS Bakuchu is displayed in a default color (e.g., black) and a voice such as "Mumu VS Bakuchu" is output as a narration voice, which is the default pattern. In contrast, FIG. 250 (A-19b) is a pattern where the display of Mumu VS Bakuchu is displayed in a color different from the default color (e.g., gold) and a voice such as "Mumu VS Bakuchu" is output as a narration voice, which is a chance-up pattern. In this way, the chance-up during the SP reach is designed so that the voice output is common to both patterns and the display mode indicates whether it is the default or chance-up.

(Increased chances when reaching the target)
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the scene at the time of reach in FIG. 173 (1-8). FIG. 251 (1-8a) is the same as FIG. 173 (1-8), and is a pattern in which REACH is displayed and a voice such as "REACH" is output in the voice of Mumu, which is the default pattern. In contrast, FIG. 251 (1-8b) is a pattern in which REACH is displayed and a voice such as "super hot" is output in the voice of Mumu, which is a chance up pattern. In this way, the chance up at the time of reach is designed so that the display mode is the same for all patterns, and the voice output content indicates whether it is the default or chance up.

(Increased chances when announcing the title of a SP reach, increased chances when a reach occurs)
As shown in Figs. 250 and 251, by making the targets for expressing the chance up different, the player can be made to pay attention to various points such as the display and the sound. In addition, if the title of the SP reach is made different in the display content of the title and the sound output content (for example, Mumu VS Bakuchu is the default and Mumu VS Nezumi is the chance up), it may cause a misunderstanding that the reach content itself is different, so it is preferable to express the chance up by making the display content the same and the sound output the same, and making the display mode different. On the other hand, when the reach is reached, the decorative pattern may have the same number on the left and right, and the fact that it is REACH is indicated by other means than the letters and sound of REACH. Therefore, even if the chance up is expressed by sound as in this example, there are few elements that can cause the player to misunderstand. In addition, when the reach is reached, the display content may be different and the sound may be different to express the chance up.

(Character's mouth movements)
In the embodiments described so far, only opening and closing of the character's mouth has been described, but it may be as shown in Figs. 252 and 253. Fig. 252 shows the mouth display for each vowel when the character is displayed sideways. Fig. 253 shows the mouth display for each vowel when the character is displayed facing forward. In this way, by providing a mouth display for each vowel, a more realistic expression can be achieved, which can attract players to the gaming machine.

Below, we will explain the details of the matters explained so far and the wording of the form.

(Supplementary note: Timing when text display starts)
The timing when character display starts includes the following: the timing when characters begin to become visible, as shown in Figure 228 (12-1); the timing when the effect display, which is displayed simultaneously with the character display, starts, and the character display itself is not yet visible, but is displayed in a layer behind the effect display; and the timing when the scene changes to one in which character display is performed. The timing when character display starts is conceptualized as the starting point for starting character display, regardless of the visibility of the character display.

(Additional Size Change)
Size change was explained using the transition of characters that make up the Powerful Bonus in Figure 228. Size change refers to the situation where characters are enlarged or reduced. If the character size of the currently displayed image changes in the next frame, a size change has occurred, and if the character size of the currently displayed image does not change in the next frame, a size change has not occurred.

(Additional fixed size)
The fixed size refers to a size that is determined in advance. The fixed size is a size that the designer believes will be easy to see when considering the player's visibility. When the fixed size is reached, the design is such that the text display remains stationary for a predetermined number of frames (e.g., 60 frames, or about 2 seconds' worth of frames) without changing the size. When the text display remains stationary for a predetermined number of seconds in a display state that provides good visibility to the player, the size of the text display can be said to be the fixed size.

(Additional position change)
The position change was explained using the transition of the characters that make up the Powerful Bonus in Figure 228. A position change refers to a situation in which the area (position) in which the characters are displayed is changing. If the display position of the characters in the currently displayed image changes in the next frame, a position change has occurred, and if the display position of the characters in the currently displayed image does not change in the next frame, a position change has not occurred.
In addition, the letters making up POWERFUL BONUS in FIG. 228 may be displayed shrinking as they move from the left toward the center.

(Additional Fixed Position)
A fixed position refers to a position that is determined in advance. A predetermined position is a position that the designer believes will be easy to see when considering the player's visibility. When a fixed position is reached, the character display is designed to remain stationary for a predetermined number of frames (e.g., 60 frames, or about 2 seconds' worth of frames) without changing its position. When the character display remains stationary for a predetermined number of seconds in a display state that provides good visibility to the player, the position of the character display can be said to be a fixed position.

(Additional Effects Display)
An effect display refers to a display that adds some kind of effect to the display of a target. The effect is one in which the target is emphasized. For example, an effect display would be a display of light particles that give the impression of sparkling on the display of "mumu" (the display of the target) as in the display of FIG. 239 (1-8'), or an explosion-like display that gives the impression of the word "powerful" being displayed with force as in the display of FIG. 228 (12-1). Although not shown, if the display of the text itself has been processed, that processing corresponds to an effect display. For example, if the surface of the word "powerful" is processed to sparkle by shining light from the front and shining the light in a moving manner on the word "powerful," then the sparkle caused by that processing corresponds to an effect display.

(Additional note: Good visibility)
Good visibility is a display state in which the designer wants the player to clearly recognize the display. When the effect display covers the text display, visibility is poor, and when the effect display has cleared the text display, visibility is good. When the size is changing (when the size of the text display is changing in successive frames), visibility is poorer than when it is displayed at a fixed size (when the size of the text display does not change in successive frames), and when it is displayed at a fixed size, visibility is good compared to when it is changing in size. When the position is changing (when the position of the text display is changing in successive frames), visibility is poorer than when it is displayed at a fixed position (when the position of the text display does not change in successive frames), and when it is displayed at a fixed position, visibility is good compared to when it is changing in position.

(Additional sound effects)
Sound effects are auxiliary sounds that are used to help imagine or recall a certain situation. They may be made from the actual sound of the situation or may be artificially created sounds. Unlike voices, sound effects do not include voices.

(Additional information takes precedence)
The concept of priority is to make the target event easier to understand for the player than the target event. In the case of a display, this corresponds to prioritizing the display of the target on a layer in front of the display of the target. In the case of sound, this corresponds to prioritizing increasing the volume of the target sound or using more speakers to output the target sound.

(Additional information: When specific characters are displayed)
A situation in which a specific character is displayed includes a situation in which only the specific character is displayed, and a situation in which multiple characters including the specific character are displayed. Furthermore, an event in which the voice of a specific character is output when a specific character is displayed includes both a situation in which the specific character is displayed throughout the period in which the voice is output, and a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a portion of the period in which the voice is output. Conversely, an event in which the voice of a specific character is output when a specific character is not displayed is limited to a situation in which the specific character is not displayed throughout the period in which the voice of the specific character is output. Furthermore, an event in which a voice different from the voice of a specific character is output when a specific character is displayed includes both a situation in which the specific character is displayed throughout the period in which the voice is output, and a situation in which the specific character is displayed during a portion of the period in which the voice is output.

(Additional fluctuation patterns)
The wording used in the form includes a first variation pattern for normal state and a second variation pattern for normal state. In addition, there is a first variation pattern for special state and a second variation pattern for special state. These variation patterns are sufficient as long as they are variation patterns in which a jackpot or a miss is notified by the same SP reach at the very least, and the same performance does not necessarily have to be executed during the period until a jackpot or a miss is notified. Even in this case, the feature points such as the number of times the sound is output and the number of scenes described in the form are designed to be satisfied.

(Additional Mouth Movement Dynamic Still)
Regarding the movement of the mouth of the character, when it is dynamically displayed, the mouth may be opened and closed repeatedly in accordance with the sound output period, or may be opened and closed repeatedly only in the first period of the sound output period in accordance with the start of the sound output. When the mouth is displayed statically, the mouth is limited to not moving at all during the sound output period. When the mouth is dynamically moved, opening and closing the mouth is set as one set, and the number of sets to be repeated varies depending on the sound output period. Before the line is spoken, it is preferable to have the mouth closed, and to open the mouth in accordance with the timing of the sound output. In this way, the sound and the display are linked at the timing of the line, and a performance that attracts the player more can be provided. As shown in FIG. 188 (15-3), (15-5), (15-7) to (15-9), by designing the display of the character to be larger in the performance in which the mouth is dynamically displayed than in the performance in which the mouth is static, the situation in which the sound is being output can be more easily understood, and a performance that attracts the player more can be provided. In addition, by designing the character to be displayed for a longer period of time in a presentation in which the mouth is displayed dynamically than in a presentation in which the mouth is stationary, as in Figures 188 (15-3), (15-5), (15-7) to (15-9), it is possible to make it easier to understand the situation in which sound is being output, and to provide a presentation that is more appealing to players.

(Supplementary note: Text display corresponding to voice)
When displaying text corresponding to audio, the display period may be completely linked to the audio output period or may be longer than the audio output period. By lengthening the display period, it becomes possible for the player to understand the content even if he or she misses the audio.

(Additional information: When a specific character is displayed, a sound other than that of the specific character is output)
As in Figures 177 (10-2) to (10-11), when Mumu is displayed and a narration voice is output, it is preferable that the mouth of Mumu is displayed in a fixed position without moving. In the example of Figure 177, the mouth is kept open, but it may be kept closed. This prevents the viewer from mistaking that Mumu is speaking. Figure 179 (A-19) has a similar idea, and the mouths of multiple characters are not moved.

(Supplementary information: Sound that matches the displayed content, sound that does not match the displayed content)
The target situations are situations in which some kind of sound is output and text is displayed. Sound that matches the displayed content means that the text display and the reading out are the same, and sound that does not match the displayed content includes cases in which the displayed content and the sound have different endings, as in FIG. 177 (10-1), and cases in which content that is completely different from the displayed content (however, sound that refers to something else in that situation, in the example of FIG. 177 (10-3), the text display shows "GO" indicating the start of raising the meter, and the sound output is "Press--" to encourage the operation of a button). Other cases include outputting an abbreviated sound of the displayed content (for example, abbreviating a display such as "Fishing Challenge" to "Fishing Challenge"), and conversely, outputting the displayed content in full sound.

(Supplementary: Specific light emission mode)
The specific light-emitting mode used in the wording of the form includes blinking as in Figures 232 and 233, and emitting light with a brightness higher than other lamps, although not shown.

The features of the active display, pending display appearance animation, dwell animation, end animation, and shift animation described in the first half, and the features of the character sound described thereafter, can all be implemented in one gaming machine. The objective of this gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with an improved series of flows from the start winning to the stop of fluctuations, and from the start winning to the end of the jackpot round. The above-mentioned objective is to provide various features in the series of flows, such as features of the appearance animation when the start winning occurs and the shift animation when the fluctuations begin, features related to the output of sounds generated during fluctuations, and features related to the output of sounds generated during the fanfare period and the jackpot round. In this way, it is assumed that various features will be implemented as necessary, and this invention provides a synergistic effect due to these features.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot game state in which game balls can enter the jackpot winning port and more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the start winning port or the normal winning port 10 is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability-changing state may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the winning port than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. A gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not the advantageous state will be reached after the effect identification information becomes a reach state ,
As a pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed , there are a first pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed, a second pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after executing a first suggestion effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a third pattern in which the specific notification effect is executed after executing a second suggestion effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern,
The third pattern has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second pattern,
In the first pattern, when the performance identification information is a reach, a reach sound corresponding to the reach is output by a voice of a specific character, and then, during a period until the specific notification performance is executed, the specific character is not displayed;
In the second pattern, a first suggestive sound corresponding to the first suggestive performance is output by a voice of the specific character, and then, the specific character can be displayed during a period until the specific notification performance is executed;
In the third pattern, a second suggestive sound corresponding to the second suggestive performance is output by the voice of the specific character, and then the specific character can be displayed during a period until the specific notification performance is executed;
A gaming machine in which an output period of the second suggestive sound is longer than an output period of the first suggestive sound .

Images